FCC ID: HFSOA8WM3B2100 NoteBook

Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter User's Guide [Preliminary Draft]

The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter is a wireless device that operates at 5 and 2.4 GHz. This adapter operates with high-capacity networks using multiple access points within large or small environments. Using the Intel(R) PROSet Windows utility you can configure, manage wireless local area network (WLAN) management tasks, adapter switching functions, and connections. Wireless LAN General Information About Wireless LAN Technology Adapter Setup and Configuration Software Installation Using PROSet Connecting to a Network Security Overview Setting Up Security Troubleshooting Specifications Glossary Support and Warranty Customer Support Software License Safety and Regulatory Notices Limited Warranty Legal Notices Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Intel, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Back to Contents About Wireless LAN Technology Choosing a WLAN Configuring a WLAN Identifying a WLAN Surveying the Site of Your WLAN Factors Affecting Range Stronger Security A wireless network connects computers without using network cables. Computers use radio communications to send data between each other. You can communicate directly with other wireless computers, or connect to an existing network through a wireless access point. When you set up your wireless adapter, you select the operating mode for the kind of wireless network you want. You can use your Intel(R) PRO/Wireless adapter to connect to other similar wireless devices that comply with the 802.11 standard for wireless networking. Choosing a Wireless LAN Mode Wireless LANs can operate with or without access points, depending on the number of users in the network. Infrastructure mode uses access points to allow wireless computers to send and receive information. Wireless computers transmit to the access point, the access point receives the information and rebroadcasts it to other computers. The access point can also connect to a wired network or to the Internet. Multiple access points can work together to provide coverage over a wide area. Peer-to-Peer mode, also called Ad Hoc mode, works without access points and allows wireless computers to send information directly to other wireless computers. You can use Peer-to-Peer mode to network computers in a home or small office or to set up a temporary wireless network for a meeting. Configuring a Wireless LAN There are three basic components that must be configured for a wireless LAN to operate properly:

Network NameEach wireless network uses a unique Network Name to identify the network. This name is called the Service Set Identifier (SSID). When you set up your wireless adapter, you specify the SSID. If you want to connect to an existing network, you must use the name for that network. If you are setting up your own network you can make up your own name and use it on each computer. The name can be up to 32 characters long and contain letters and numbers. ProfilesWhen you set up your computer to access a wireless network, Intel(R) PROSet creates a profile for the wireless settings that you specify. If you want to connect to another network, you can scan for existing networks and make a temporary connection, or create a new profile for that network. After you create profiles, your computer will automatically connect when you change locations. SecurityThe 802.11 wireless networks use encryption to help protect your data. Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) uses a 64-bit or 128-bit shared encryption key to scramble data. Before a computer transmits data, it scrambles the data using the secret encryption key. The receiving computer uses this same key to unscramble the data. If you are connecting to an existing network, use the encryption key provided by the administrator of the wireless network. If you are setting up your own network you can make up your own key and use it on each computer. Identifying a Wireless Network Depending on the size and components of a wireless LAN, there are many ways to identify a wireless LAN:

The Network Name or Service Set Identifier (SSID)Identifies a wireless network. All wireless devices on the network must use the same SSID. Extended Service Set Identifier (ESSID)A special case of SSID used to identify a wireless network that includes access points. Independent Basic Service Set Identifier (IBSSID)A special case of SSID used to identify a network of wireless computers configured to communicate directly with one another without using an access point. Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID)A unique identifier for each wireless device. The BSSID is the Ethernet MAC address of the device. Broadcast SSIDAn access point can respond to computers sending probe packets with the broadcast SSID. If this feature is enabled on the access point, any wireless user can associate with the access point by using a blank (null) SSID. Surveying the Site of Your Wireless LAN Conducting a site survey for your wireless LAN is the most crucial step in the process of setting up a wireless network. It greatly reduces the amount of troubleshooting you will have to do once you have the wireless LAN set up and ready for connection testing. To conduct a site survey, you will need the following tools:

An access point (or laptop computer) that is set up to be the transmitter. It should be mounted near and at the same height as the designated location of your wireless LAN. A laptop that will act as the mobile receiver. It must contain your site survey software. An area or building map, which will be used to plot the strength of your signals. Once you have the tools you need, you are ready to survey the inside of the building. Launch the site survey software on the mobile receiver laptop and carry it around in the intended wireless LAN area to test the signal strength. Be sure to also check the signal strength of each intended access point location. If you encounter problems while surveying the site, make sure your transmitter laptop is not located on a wall containing metal, such as an air-conditioning duct, which will interfere with the range of your signal. Simply move the transmitter and test the signal strength again. For users to have seamless coverage when moving from access point to access point, the signal levels at each point must overlap. There is software available that will seamlessly hand off changing signal levels from one access point to another. Your building's infrastructure can sometimes interfere with the microwave signal, but finding the location and cause of the interference will allow you to figure out the best place to mount your access points for optimal area coverage. Microwave signals travel in all directions, which means you can have one access point for a multi-floor building. However, the range is highly dependent on the material used to construct the flooring, especially metal materials. Once your signal strength is strong inside the building, you are ready to check the strength outside the building. To do so, simply carry the mobile receiver laptop as far down the street or around the building as you can go without losing significant signal strength. If possible, you should be aware of the types of networks being used by the companies on the floors above and below you, so that you can work together in harmony. With wireless networks, security is very important and if you communicate with those around you, you are better prepared to select the right channels, as well as the best location for access points. Factors Affecting Range Although access points can transmit signals up to 60 feet away in an area with many walled barriers or as much as 500 feet away in a large open area, the range is affected by the following factors:

Building materials, such as steel and drywall, can shorten the range of the radio signals. Physical layout of the area can interfere with the signals and cause them to be dropped. Electronic noise from cell phones, microwave ovens, or other devices on the same frequency can interfere with the transmission of the signals. Range is inversely proportional to data rate, so the faster that the signals are sent, the less distance they will travel. Taking these factors into consideration when you survey the site for your WLAN is key to providing all of your users with undisturbed mobile connectivity. Using multiple access points will, of course, reduce the impact of these factors if your area has dividing walls throughout. Stronger Security Although wireless networks are easy to use, the main issue lies with security. Even if you enable the security settings defined in the 802.11b standard, as well as the security settings of your hardware, your network is still vulnerable. There are a few things you can do to make it more difficult for outsiders to access your network:

Change the default network name of your WLAN. Every manufacturer's default settings are public knowledge. Do not allow the name of your network to be broadcasted by your access points. This makes it more difficult for hackers to identify your network. Enable Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption, which is the same security feature used by online shopping websites. Change your encryption keys as often as possible. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol

(TKIP), which is being developed by a IEEE task group, will change the keys automatically. Enable MAC address filtering so that each access point can generate a list of approved MAC addresses for your WLAN. If you have a small network, use virtual private network encryption for additional security. If you have a large network, you may want to install a gateway between your access points and network clients. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Software Installation Installing Drivers and PROSet Software See the instructions for your operating system:

Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows Me Windows 98SE Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Installation under Windows XP Preliminary Notes The installation instructions in this section are based on the following assumptions:

The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter hardware has already been installed in the computer in accordance with the computer manufacturer's instructions. The computer has not been powered on since the hardware installation was completed. No other wireless LAN card is installed in this computer. To install the driver before installing hardware, use Start > Run and browse to the file SetupWLD.exe in the path PROW7100\WINXP on the Intel CD. After running SetupWLD.exe, shut down the computer and install the hardware. When the computer restarts, the driver will be automatically installed. Before proceeding, make sure that you are operating Windows XP with administrative rights. If you log in to Windows XP without administrative rights, you may run into problems during the installation. The Intel(R) PROSet utility or the Windows XP wireless configuration feature can be used to configure wireless network settings. The instructions below include steps for installing the PROSet utility and for turning off the Windows XP configuration feature. If you do not turn off the Windows XP feature, you will not be able to use PROSet to configure wireless network settings. For information on how to use the Windows XP feature, see your Windows XP documentation. Driver Installation To install drivers under Windows* XP, follow these steps:

1. Power up the computer in which the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless Mini PCI Adapter hardware has just been installed. 2. Log in with administrative rights if prompted by Windows XP. 3. Wait for Windows to detect the newly installed hardware and display the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog. Verify that Install the software automatically

(Recommended) is selected. If Windows does not detect the new hardware, see Troubleshooting. Insert the Intel CD into your CD drive. The New Hardware Found Wizard searches for the correct driver files and copies them to your hard drive. 5. On the Network Name screen, click Next to accept the default Network Name (SSID) 4. 101, or enter a specific SSID for your network, then click Next. 6. On the Data Encryption screen, click Next to accept the default encryption setting None, or enter specific encryption settings for your network, then click Next. 7. On the Found New Hardware Wizard screen, click Finish. Proceed to disable the Windows XP wireless configuration feature. Disable Windows XP Wireless Configuration (Required) To disable the Windows XP wireless configuration feature so that you can use Intel(R) PROSet for wireless configuration, continue as follows:

Instructions are written for use with the Windows XP Start Menu and Control Panel Category View, not with "Classic" Start Menu or Control Panel views. 8. Click Start and Control Panel. 9. On the Pick a category screen, click Network and Internet Connections, then under the heading or pick a Control Panel icon click Network Connections. 10. In the Network Connections window, right-click your Wireless Network Connection and select Properties. 11. Select the Wireless Networks tab. 12. Click to clear ("deselect") the check box Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings, then click OK on the Wireless Network tab. Do not click any other tabs. Continue with the installation of PROSet. Intel(R) PROSet Installation (Required) Continue with the following steps to install the Intel PROSet wireless configuration utility

(required):

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of utility software. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the PROSet installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file PROSet.msi in the path APPS/PROSet/2K-NET32 on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 13 and 14 below and continue with Step 15. 13. Display the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen by removing and re-inserting the Intel CD, or by running autorun.exe from the CD. Click Wireless LAN Adapters. 14. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install Software. 15. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) PROSet screen, click Next. 16. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 17. On the Setup Type screen, select Typical and then click Next. This is the recommended setting for a first-time installation. 18. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 19. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. Click Exit to close the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen or leave it open if you wish to install Wireless Administration Tools. 20. To launch Intel PROSet, double-click the PROSet icon in the system tray or follow the path Start > Programs > Intel Network Adapters > Intel(R) PROSet. For additional information on the program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. Administration Tools Installation (Optional) Continue with the following steps to install the Intel(R) Wireless Administration Tools Site Survey and AP Discovery (optional):

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of the Administration Tools. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the Administration Tools installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file APAdmin.msi in the path APPS/PROSet/2K-NET32 on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 21 and 22 below and continue with Step 23. 21. On the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen, click Wireless LAN Adapters. You can display this screen by removing and re-inserting the Intel CD, or by running 22. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install AP Admin Tools. 23. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) Wireless Administration autorun.exe from the CD. Tools screen, click Next. 24. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 25. On the Setup Type screen, verify that Typical is selected, then click Next. 26. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 27. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. Click Exit to close the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen. 28. To launch the Wireless Administration Tools, follow the path Start > Programs > Intel(R) PRO Wireless > Access Point Administration Tools and select AP Discovery or Site Survey. For additional information on either program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Installation under Windows 2000 Preliminary Notes The installation instructions in this section are based on the following assumptions:

The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter hardware has already been installed in the computer in accordance with the computer manufacturer's instructions. The computer has not been powered on since the hardware installation was completed. No other wireless LAN card is installed in this computer. To install the driver before installing hardware, use Start > Run and browse to the file SetupWLD.exe in the path PROW7100\WIN2K on the Intel CD. After running SetupWLD.exe, shut down the computer and install the hardware. When the computer restarts, the driver will be automatically installed. After loading the Windows 2000 operating system, be sure to log in with administrative rights. If you log in to Windows 2000 without administrative rights, you may run into problems during the installation. During initial adapter installation and configuration, it may take up to two minutes for adapter settings to be confirmed. Driver Installation To install driver software in Windows* 2000, follow these steps:

1. Power up the computer in which the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter hardware has just been installed. 2. Log in with administrative rights when prompted by Windows 2000. 3. Wait for Windows to detect the newly installed hardware and display the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog. If Windows does not detect the new hardware, see Troubleshooting. Insert the Intel CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen appears, leave it open and click the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog to make that the active window. 5. On the Install Hardware Device Drivers screen verify that Search for a suitable driver 4. for my device (recommended) is selected, then click Next. 6. When the Locate Driver Files dialog appears, verify that the item CD-ROM drives is checked and click Next. found, click Next. 7. When the Driver Files Search Results dialog appears, indicating that a driver was 8. On the Network Name screen, click Next to accept the default Network Name (SSID) 101, or enter a specific SSID for your network, then click Next. 9. On the Data Encryption screen, click Next to accept the default encryption setting None, or enter specific encryption settings for your network, then click Next. 10. On the Found New Hardware Wizard screen, click Finish. Proceed to install Intel PROSet. Intel(R) PROSet Installation (Required) Continue with the following steps to install the Intel PROSet wireless configuration utility

(required):

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of utility software. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the PROSet installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file PROSet.msi in the path APPS/PROSet/2K-NET32 on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 11 and 12 below and continue with Step 13. 11. On the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen, click Wireless LAN Adapters. This screen may have been launched in step 4 above. If the screen is not visible when you close the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog, display it by removing and re-

inserting the Intel CD, or by running autorun.exe from the CD. 12. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install Software. 13. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) PROSet screen, click Next. 14. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 15. On the Setup Type screen, verify that Typical is selected, then click Next. This is the recommended setting for a first-time installation. 16. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 17. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. Click Exit to close the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen or leave it open if you wish to install Wireless Administration Tools. 18. To launch Intel PROSet, double-click the PROSet icon in the system tray or follow the path Start > Programs > Intel Network Adapters > Intel(R) PROSet. For additional information on the program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. During initial adapter installation and configuration, it may take up to two minutes for adapter settings to be confirmed. Administration Tools Installation (Optional) Continue with the following steps to install the Intel(R) Wireless Administration Tools Site Survey and AP Discovery (optional):

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of the Administration Tools. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the Administration Tools installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file APAdmin.msi in the path APPS/PROSet/2K-NET32 on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 19 and 20 below and continue with Step 21. 19. On the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen, click Wireless LAN Adapters. This screen may have been launched in step 4 above. If the screen is not visible when you close the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog, display it by removing and re-

inserting the Intel CD, or by running autorun.exe from the CD. 20. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install AP Admin Tools. 21. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) Wireless Administration Tools screen, click Next. 22. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 23. On the Setup Type screen, verify that Typical is selected, then click Next. 24. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 25. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. Click Exit to close the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen. 26. To launch the Wireless Administration Tools, follow the path Start > Programs > Intel(R) PRO Wireless > Access Point Administration Tools and select AP Discovery or Site Survey. For additional information on either program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Installation under Windows Me Preliminary Notes The installation instructions in this section are based on the following assumptions:

The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter hardware has already been installed in the computer in accordance with the computer manufacturer's instructions. The computer has not been powered on since the hardware installation was completed. No other wireless LAN card is installed in this computer. To install the driver before installing hardware, use Start > Run and browse to the file SetupWLD.exe in the path PROW7100\WINSE-ME on the Intel CD. After running SetupWLD.exe, shut down the computer and install the hardware. When the computer restarts, the driver will be automatically installed. Driver Installation To install the software in Windows* Me (Millennium Edition), follow these steps:

1. Power up the computer in which the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter hardware has just been installed. 2. Wait for Windows to detect the newly installed hardware and display the Add New Hardware Wizard dialog. DO NOT click Next. Verify that Automatic search for a better driver (Recommended) is selected. If Windows does not detect the new hardware, see Troubleshooting. Insert the Intel CD into your CD drive. Windows installs the driver from the CD. If the installation does not start automatically, click Next on the Add New Hardware Wizard screen. 4. On the Network Name screen, click Next to accept the default Network Name (SSID) 3. 101, or enter a specific SSID for your network, then click Next. 5. On the Data Encryption screen, click Next to accept the default encryption setting None, or enter specific encryption settings for your network, then click Next. 6. Click Finish on the Add New Hardware Wizard screen when the driver installation is 7. When prompted to restart the computer, click No. You will restart it manually later. complete. Proceed to install PROSet. Intel(R) PROSet Installation (Required) To install the Intel PROSet utility, continue with the following steps:

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of utility software. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the PROSet installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file PROSet.msi in the path APPS/PROSet/WN98SEME on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 8 and 9 below and continue with Step 10. 8. Display the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen by removing and re-inserting the Intel CD, or by running autorun.exe from the CD. Click Wireless Adapters. 9. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install Software. 10. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) PROSet II screen, click Next. 11. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 12. On the Setup Type screen, select Typical and then click Next. This is the recommended setting for a first-time installation. 13. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 14. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. 15. When prompted to restart the computer, click Yes. 16. To launch Intel PROSet, double-click the PROSet icon in the system tray or follow the path Start > Programs > Intel Network Adapters > Intel(R) PROSet. For additional information on the program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. Administration Tools Installation (Optional) After restarting the computer, continue with the following steps to install the Intel(R) Wireless Administration Tools Site Survey and AP Discovery (optional):

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of the Administration Tools. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the Administration Tools installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file APAdmin.msi in the path APPS/PROSet/WN98SEME on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 17 and 18 below and continue with Step 19. 17. On the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen, click Wireless LAN Adapters. You can display this screen by removing and re-inserting the Intel CD, or by running 18. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install AP Admin Tools. 19. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) Wireless Administration autorun.exe from the CD. Tools screen, click Next. 20. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 21. On the Setup Type screen, verify that Typical is selected, then click Next. 22. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 23. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. 24. To launch the Wireless Administration Tools, follow the path Start > Programs > Intel(R) PRO Wireless > Access Point Administration Tools and select AP Discovery or Site Survey. For additional information on either program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Installation under Windows 98SE Preliminary Notes The installation instructions in this section are based on the following assumptions:

The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter hardware has already been installed in the computer in accordance with the computer manufacturer's instructions. The computer has not been powered on since the hardware installation was completed. No other wireless LAN card is installed in the computer. To install the driver before installing hardware, use Start > Run and browse to the file SetupWLD.exe in the path PROW7100\WINSE-ME on the Intel CD. After running SetupWLD.exe, shut down the computer and install the hardware. When the computer restarts, the driver will be automatically installed. Driver Installation To install the software in Windows* 98SE, follow these steps:

1. Power up the computer in which the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter hardware has just been installed. 2. Wait for Windows to detect the newly installed hardware and display the Add New Hardware Wizard dialog. Click Next. If Windows does not detect the new hardware, see Troubleshooting. Insert the Intel CD into your CD drive. 3. 4. On the New Hardware Wizard screen, select Search for the best driver for you device (Recommended), and click Next, then select CD drive and click Next. 5. On the Network Name screen, click Next to accept the default Network Name (SSID) 101, or enter a specific SSID for your network, then click Next. 6. On the Data Encryption screen, click Next to accept the default encryption setting None, or enter specific encryption settings for your network, then click Next. 7. On the Add New Hardware Wizard screen, click Finish. 8. When prompted to restart the computer, click No. You will restart it manually later. Proceed to the installation of PROSet. Intel(R) PROSet Installation (Required) To install the Intel PROSet utility, continue with the following steps:

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of utility software. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the PROSet installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file PROSet.msi in the path APPS/PROSet/WN98SEME on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 9 and 10 below and continue with Step 11. 9. Display the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen by removing and re-inserting the Intel CD, or by running autorun.exe from the CD. Click Wireless Adapters. 10. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install Software. 11. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) PROSet II screen, click Next. 12. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 13. On the Setup Type screen, select Typical and then click Next. This is the recommended setting for a first-time installation. 14. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 15. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. 16. When prompted to restart the computer, click Yes. 17. To launch Intel PROSet, double-click the PROSet icon in the system tray or follow the path Start > Programs > Intel Network Adapters > Intel(R) PROSet. For additional information on the program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. Administration Tools Installation (Optional) After restarting the computer, continue with the following steps to install the Intel(R) Wireless Administration Tools Site Survey and AP Discovery (optional):

Some versions of this product do not support the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen for installation of the Administration Tools. If the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections menu screen does not appear, or if it does not have a menu item for Wireless LAN Adapters, you can start the Administration Tools installer manually using Start > Run and browsing to the file APAdmin.msi in the path APPS/PROSet/WN98SEME on the Intel CD supplied with the product. Skip Steps 18 and 19 below and continue with Step 20. 18. On the Intel(R) PRO Network Connections screen, click Wireless LAN Adapters. You can display this screen by removing and re-inserting the Intel CD, or by running 19. On the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapters menu screen, click Install AP Admin Tools. 20. On the Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Intel(R) Wireless Administration autorun.exe from the CD. Tools screen, click Next. 21. On the License Agreement screen, after reading the license agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 22. On the Setup Type screen, verify that Typical is selected, then click Next. 23. On the Ready to Install the Program screen click Install. 24. After the software is installed on your computer, click Finish. 25. To launch the Wireless Administration Tools, follow the path Start > Programs > Intel(R) PRO Wireless > Access Point Administration Tools and select AP Discovery or Site Survey. For additional information on either program, press F1 or click Help while the program is running. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Page Using Wireless Profiles in PROSet Creating a New Profile Creating a VPN Profile Automatic Profile Distribution Editing an Existing Profile Importing and Exporting Profiles Deleting a Profile Connecting to a Network without a Profile Profile Connection Preferences Loading a Profile from the Task Tray A profile is a saved group of network settings. Profiles are displayed in the Profile List in the PROSet General page. Profiles can be arranged in order of network connection priority. You can connect to one network using the first profile in the Profile List, then automatically connect to another network using the next profile. This allows you to stay connected while roaming freely from one wireless network to another. Although you can assign multiple profiles to a single network, you can only use one profile per connection. Profile general settings include, the network name (SSID), channel, security settings, and TCP/IP settings. The Networks tab allows you to add, edit and delete profiles. Creating a New Profile To add a new profile, use the Profile Wizard sequence of dialogs to configure the profile contents. The following example uses all of the Profile Wizard dialogs. Some settings may not be required for all profiles. To create a new profile and connect to a network:

1. Select the wireless adapter in the left-side pane. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Add button. The General Settings dialog displays. NOTE: If this is the first time you have created a profile, click the profile named Default in the Profile List, click the Edit button and rename the default profile in the Profile Name field on the General page. Step 1 of 4: General Settings 4. Enter a profile name in the Profile Name field. 5. Enter the network SSID, in the Network Name (SSID) field. 6. Click the operating mode to use, Infrastructure or Ad hoc. 7. The Mandatory AP option is not required unless the adapter has to connect to a specific access point or computer. Click the Mandatory AP button to force the adapter to connect to a specific access point. Enter the Ethernet address for the access point or computer

(Ad-hoc). Click OK to save the setting and return to the General Settings page. 8. The Mandatory AP option is not required unless the adapter has to connect to a specific access point or computer. Click the Mandatory AP button to force the adapter to connect to a specific access point. Enter the Ethernet address for the access point or computer

(Ad-hoc). Click OK to save the setting and return to the General Settings page.Click the Configure TCP/IP and VPN settings checkbox to access the TCP/IP and VPN settings. If these settings are not required, leave the box unchecked, proceed to step 9. 9. Check the Enable Auto-Import check box to allow this profile to be imported. Refer to Automatic Profile Distribution for more information. 10. Click Next. Step 2 of 4: TCP/IP and VPN Client Settings 11. Use these options to configure TCP/IP and VPN settings for a VPN profile. Click Next when finished. Step 3 of 4: Security Settings 12. Select Open or Shared in the Network Authentication drop-down menu. Open, does not use any authentication method. Shared uses the WEP key as the authentication method. 13. Click the Enable data encryption (WEP) checkbox to configure WEP encryption settings. 14. Click the Password protect this profile checkbox to assign a password to the profile. 15. Click Next. Step 4 of 4: Password Protection Settings 16. Click the Password protect this profile checkbox. 17. Enter a password in the Password field. 18. Reenter the same password in the Confirm New Password field. 19. Click the Back button to change or verify the settings or click Finish when you have completed the profile settings and return to the Networks page. 20. Click the new profile name shown in the Profile List. Use the up and down arrows to position the priority of the new profile in the priority list. 21. Click the Advanced button to set the network connection preferences. 22. Click the Connect button to connect to the network. 23. Click OK to close the PROSet dialog. Creating a VPN Profile To create a VPN profile:

1. Select the wireless adapter in the left-side pane. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Select the profile to add VPN settings to from the Profile List. 4. Click the Edit button and the General page appears. 5. Click the Network tab. 6. Click the Configure button for the TCP/IP Settings. Make sure that Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS address automatically is selected. 7. Click the Close button to close the dialog. 8. Click the Configure button for the VPN Client Settings. 9. Click Enable VPN for this profile checkbox. 10. Select the VPN client software from the Available VPN Clients drop-down menu. 11. Select the VPN profile if your VPN client software displays the VPN tunnel name. 12. Click the Close button to close the dialog. 13. Click OK on any of the pages to save all the settings and return to the Networks page. 14. Click the VPN profile name shown in the Profile List. Use the up and down arrows to position the priority of new profile in the priority list. 15. Click the Connect button to connect to the network. The VPN profile name displays a connect icon. Note: There must be an IP address assigned before the VPN client software can be launched. Click the Details button to verify that an IP address has been assigned. 16. Follow the on-screen instructions and enter your credentials before connecting. 17. Click OK to close the PROSet dialog. Importing and Exporting Profiles Important: Only password protected profiles can be imported and exported. Refer to Setting a Profile Password for more information. To import profiles:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Advanced button. 3. Click the Import/Export button. 4. Click the Import button. 5. Locate the profile to import on your hard disk or enter the profile name in the File name field. The profile extension is .profile. 6. Click the Import to import the profile into the Profile List. 7. Click OK twice to return to the General page. 8. Click OK to close the PROSet dialog. To export profiles:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Advanced button. 3. Click the profiles to export from the export profile list. 4. Click the Browse button and select a directory to save the profiles in. Click OK to return to the previous dialog. 5. Click the Export button to start exporting the profiles. 6. Click OK twice to return to the General dialog. 7. Click OK to close the PROSet dialog. Automatic Profile Distribution The Enable Auto-Import feature allow a network administrator to distribute a profile automatically to computers connected to a network. The Enable Auto-Import box is located on the Profile Wizard dialogs. When the checkbox is checked the profile must be copied to a specific directory on the host computer, from there it can be distributed to multiple computers. Once the profile is received by the remote computer it will automatically be available for use from the Scan profile list. If an attempt is made to edit a distributed profile that is password protected, a password prompt will appear. Automatically importing WLAN profiles is accomplished by monitoring the import folder on your hard disk for new profile files. Only profile that have the Enable Auto-Import checked on the Profile Wizard dialog can be automatically imported. If a profile of the same name already exists in the Profile List, a dialog is displayed from which you can either reject the import, or accept in which case the existing profile will be replaced. All imported profiles will be placed at the bottom of the Profile List, and the profile file will be immediately deleted after the import whether the import was successful or not. To distribute a profile to other computers on a network:

1. Select a profile to be edited from the Profile List in the Networks page, and click the Edit button or click the Add button to create a new profile using the Profile Wizard. 2. Check the Enable Auto-Import checkbox on the General page. 3. Click OK (Edit a profile) or Finish (Add a profile) to save the setting. 4. Copy the profile to the Programs Files/Intel/PROSet/Import directory. The profile is now ready to distribute to other computers. Editing an Existing Profile To edit an existing profile:

1. Select the wireless adapter in the left-side pane. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Edit button. The General page displays. 4. Click on the General, Security, Network and Password tabs to make the necessary changes for the network profile settings:

5. Click OK on any of the pages to save all the settings and return to the Networks page. 6. Click the new profile name shown in the Profile List. Use the up and down arrows to position the priority of new profile in the priority list. 7. Click the Advanced button to set the network connection preferences. 8. Click the Connect button to connect to the network. 9. Click OK to close the PROSet dialog. Deleting a Profile To delete a profile:

1. Select the wireless adapter in the left-side pane. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Click the profile to be deleted from the Profile List. 4. Click the Delete button. 5. Click Yes to permanently delete the profile. Connecting to a Network Without a Profile To connect to an available network without a profile:

1. Select the wireless adapter in the left-side pane. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Scan button. 4. Select the network profile name with <no profile> shown, and click the Connect button. 5. Click the No, connect me directly without creating a profile option. Note, you can click Yes, create a profile for this network now to create a profile to be used later. 6. Click OK to connect. Profile Connection Preferences To access the profile connection preference option:

1. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 2. Click the Advanced button. 3. Under the Auto-connection heading, click the one of the following options:

Connect to available networks using profiles only (Default setting): Use the profiles in the Profile List to connect to any available network. Connect to any available network if no matching profile is found: Connect to any available network without using a profile from the Profile List. 4. Click OK to save the setting and return to the previous dialog. Loading a Profile from the Task Tray To load a profile from the Task Tray:

1. Right-click PROSet icon in the task tray. 2. Select the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN 7100 3B Mini PCI Adapter. 3. Click Select Profile and select the profile to be launched. Back to Contents Page Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Page Connecting to a Network using PROSet Connecting to a Network Automatically Scanning for Available Networks Connecting to a Network Using an Access Point Connecting to a Peer-to-Peer (Ad Hoc) Network Disconnecting from a Network Switching the Adapter Off and On Switching Between Wired and Wireless Adapters Connecting to a Network Automatically The Configuration Service feature operates in background to automatically display available networks not listed in the Profile List. This method provides automatic connection in a 2.4 or 5GHz environment to available networks in the range of your wireless adapter. The Configuration Service constantly monitors your wireless adapter's connection status. If no matching profiles are found in the Profile List for a network, a dialog automatically displays the available network access points and computers (ad hoc mode) within range of the wireless adapter. The Configuration Service can also be used if there is more than one wireless adapter installed using 802.11a and 802.11b bands. The Configuration Service features are as follows:

The Configuration Service is launched when you log on to your computer. No active profile switching will be performed. Once the adapter is associated with the access point, if a higher priority profile becomes available, no switching will occur. The Configuration Service is only be available if the PROSet is installed. If a connection to an access point cannot be made using any of the profiles in the Profile List, a dialog will display the available networks. If there are multiple profiles listed for an available network, a dialog box will list the profiles for you to choose from. The Configuration Service can be used in two ways:

To connect using preferred profiles only. In this mode the Configuration Service will attempt to connect to a network access point using the Profile List only. If a matching profile is not found, a dialog appears that lists available networks. From this dialog you can connect to any available network. You can also close this dialog without connecting by clicking the Cancel button. The adapter will remain unassociated, and the list of available networks will NOT be displayed again unless a new available network is detected. To connect to any available network (if no matching profile found). In this mode, the Configuration Service attempts to connect to a network access point using the Profile List. If no matching profile is found, the Configuration Service attempts to automatically connect to any available network. This mode is set in the Advanced Setting. Enabling Automatic Connection The Configuration Service also monitors for the "resume status" after a laptop computer suspend event. When this occurs, the Configuration Service will re-enable the automatic connection service. These features can be enabled again after rebooting your computer or after a suspend and resume cycle. Disabling Automatic Connection The Configuration Service watches for another profile management service, such as Windows*

XP Zero Config and AAA clients, to be detected. When another service is found, the Configuration Service stops processing connection information and a dialog box gives you the option of disabling the Configuration Service or continuing your wireless connection without interruption. To re-enable the Configuration Service:

1. Reboot your computer. 2. Resume after a computer suspend. 3. Use the Advanced Settings options to manually re-enable the Configuration Service. NOTE: The Configuration Service displays a list of available networks within the range of your wireless adapter when no matching profiles are found in the Profile List and the Connect button is not used to connect to a network. When the Configuration Service is disabled, the current connection will continue with the following PROSet features disabled:

The Connect button on the Profile page is disabled. The Scan button can be used to scan for available networks, but the Connect button is disabled when used to connect to a network. Ad hoc mode is disabled and the Connect button in the Ad Hoc Connect dialog box is disabled. From the Task Tray menu, launching an ad hoc profile and applying a profile is disabled. The buttons described above will not be disabled if you click the message: Another wireless LAN utility is communicating with the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Adapter. To avoid conflicts, PROSet has temporarily disabled its Profile Management features. Scanning for Available Networks A fast way to connect to a network is to use the Scan button to search for a network access point in range of your wireless adapter. When a network is found, you can instantly connect without a profile or create a new profile. NOTE: Profiles with the Enable Auto-Import feature enabled will also be displayed in the profile list of available networks. Refer to Automatic Profile Distribution for more information. To scan for available networks:

1. From the General page, select the wireless adapter on the left side pane. 2. Select the Networks tab. 3. Click the Scan button. 4. The Available Networks dialog displays the names of the available networks. 5. Select the network from the list, and click the Connect button. Click the Refresh button to refresh the list of available networks. 6. To connect without creating a profile, click No, connect me directly without creating a profile. Click Yes, create a profile for this network now to create a new profile using the Profile Wizard. 7. Click OK to connect to a network. Connecting to a Network Using an Access Point An infrastructure network consists of one or more access points and one or more computers with wireless adapters installed. Each access point must have a wired connection to the Local Area Network (LAN). The following describes how to create a new profile using the Profile Wizard and connect to an access point using the Connect button. You can also connect to a network, by using the Scan button. 1. From the General page, select the wireless adapter on the left side pane. 2. Click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Add button. 4. Enter the profile name in the text box. 5. Enter a network name (SSID) in the text box. 6. Select Infrastructure for the operating mode. 7. The Mandatory AP option is not required unless the adapter has to connect to a specific access point or computer. Click the Mandatory AP button to force the adapter to connect to a specific access point. Enter the Ethernet address for the access point or computer

(Ad-hoc). Click OK to save the setting and return to the General Settings page. 8. Click the Configure TCP/IP and VPN settings check box and click the Next button to access the TCP/IP and VPN settings. If these settings are not required, leave the box unchecked and proceed to step 11. 9. Click the Next button to select the WEP security settings. 10. Click the Password protect this profile checkbox and click Next button to access the Password Protection settings. Click Finish after the password information has been entered. If this option is not required, leave the box unchecked and proceed to step 11. 11. Click OK to save the profile settings and return to the Networks page. 12. Under Transmit channel, Channel 7 is the default transmit channel. Unless the other computers in the ad hoc network use a different channel, there is no need to change the default channel. To change the channel, click the Adapter tab and click the Configure button under Adapter Settings. Select a channel from the 802.11b Channel List pull-

down menu. Click OK to save the setting. 13. Click OK to save the settings and return to the Networks page. 14. After creating the new profile, click the profile in the Profile List. Profiles using infrastructure mode are indicated by a computer icon next to the profile name. 15. Click the Connect button to connect to the ad hoc network. Connecting to a Peer-to-Peer (Ad Hoc) Network In peer-to-peer (ad hoc) mode, you can send and receive information to other computers without using an access point. Each computer in a peer-to-peer network is called a peer. To create or join an ad hoc network, enter a personal password. Network related settings (SSID), operating mode, WEP 128-bit encryption, and IP addresses are automatically created. Once a network connection is established, after permission rights are given by other computers in the ad hoc network, you can freely share files. All wireless clients in the ad hoc network must use the same network name (SSID) and channel number. For a list of allowed 802.11b ad hoc channels, refer to the Adapter Settings for more information. NOTE: While scanning with an ad hoc profile set to a specific transmit channel, if an ad hoc network is found on another channel, you will be connected using the new channel. The new channel number is displayed in the Adapter Settings. There are two ways to connect to an ad hoc network:

Connect using an ad hoc profile. Refer to Creating a New Profile for details. Select an ad hoc profile from the Profile List and click the Connect button. This method uses a pre-defined ad hoc profile created by the Profile Wizard. The ad hoc profile is displayed in the Profile List. One-time ad hoc session. Refer to Starting an Ad Hoc (peer-to-peer) Connection below for details. This method does not use a pre-defined profile. To connect to any ad hoc network, use the Scan button to scan for any ad hoc networks, enter the password (SSID), then click the Connect button to connect. To end the session, click the Close button to end the session. Ending an Ad Hoc Session To end an ad hoc session, click the Close button. After the session is ended, an attempt is made to re-connect to the last profile used from the Profile List. Creating an Ad Hoc Profile Using the Profile Wizard The following describes how to create a new ad hoc profile using the Profile Wizard and connect to an ad hoc network. You can also connect to a network, by using the Scan button. 1. From the General page, select the wireless adapter on the left side pane. 2. Click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Add button. 4. Enter the profile name in the text box. 5. Enter a network name (SSID) in the text box. 6. Select Ad Hoc for the operating mode. 7. The Mandatory AP option is not required unless the adapter has to connect to a specific access point or computer. Click the Mandatory AP button to force the adapter to connect to a specific access point. Enter the Ethernet address for the access point or computer

(Ad-hoc). Click OK to save the setting and return to the General Settings page. 8. Click the Configure TCP/IP and VPN settings check box and click the Next button to access the TCP/IP and VPN settings. If these settings are not required, leave the box unchecked and proceed to step 11. 9. Click the Next button to select the WEP security settings. 10. Click the Password protect this profile checkbox and click Next button to access the Password Protection settings. Click Finish after the password information has been entered. If this option is not required, leave the box unchecked and proceed to step 11. 11. Click OK to save the profile settings and return to the Networks page. 12. Under Transmit channel, Channel 7 is the default transmit channel. Unless the other computers in the ad hoc network use a different channel, there is no need to change the default channel. To change the channel, click the Adapter tab and click the Configure button under Adapter Settings. Select a channel from the 802.11b Channel List pull-

down menu. Click OK to save the setting. 13. Click OK to save the settings and return to the Networks page. 14. After creating the new profile, click the profile in the Profile List. Profiles using infrastructure mode are indicated by a computer icon next to the profile name. 15. Click the Connect button to connect to the ad hoc network. Starting an Ad Hoc (peer-to-peer) Connection To communicate properly, all computers/peers on an ad hoc network must have Intel wireless adapters installed. To connect to an ad hoc network for a one-time session:

1. From the General page, select the wireless adapter on the left side pane. 2. Click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Start button. 4. Enter the password (SSID) in the text box. 5. Under Transmit channel, Channel 7 is the default transmit channel. Unless the other computers in the ad hoc network use a different channel, there is no need to change the default channel. To change the channel, click the Advanced button. Select a channel from the pull-down channel menu under Adapter Configuration. Click OK to save the setting and return to the Ad Hoc dialog. 6. Under IP Address, the IP address is automatically assigned for your laptop wireless adapter. However, this DHCP assigned IP address can be changed. To change the IP address, click the Advanced button. Select Manual under Network Configuration, and enter the IP address and subnet mask for your laptop wireless adapter. Click OK to save the setting and return to the Ad Hoc dialog. 7. Select the peer name from the displayed list of computers in the ad hoc network. 8. Click the Connect button to connect to the ad hoc network. 9. Under Send Files, files can be sent to another computer in the ad hoc network. To send a file, click the Send File button. Locate the file you want to sent, and click Send. 10. Click the Close button to end the ad hoc session. Disconnecting from a Network To disconnect from a network, turn the radio to OFF from the General page in PROSet. Switching the Adapter Off and On When your laptop is switched on, the adapter radio is constantly transmitting signals. In certain situations, such as in a plane, signals from the radio may cause interference. This software function allows you to use your laptop with the radio switched off. To switch off the adapter radio from the General page (next to Wireless Device) click the Off button for the following results:

The wireless adapter is not associated with the network. PROSet can be used to edit or add profile contents. To switch on the adapter radio on from the General page (next to Wireless Device), click the On button for the following results:

With PROSet active, the wireless adapter will try to associate with the network access point using the last profile. If the adapter cannot connect to the access point, the Configuration Service will attempt to find an available network. Refer to Configuration Service above for more information. Switching Between Wired and Wireless Adapters Adapter switching enables your computer to automatically switch between wired and the Intel PRO/Wireless LAN 7100/2100 3B Mini PCI adapter, so your laptop computer can maintain the best possible connection to the network while moving from one location to another. When Adapter Switching is enabled, DHCP is disabled on all other wired adapters except for the adapter currently being used. However, connection is possible using another wired adapter using an auto IP address setting. Adapter switching switches between wired and wireless adapters for the following Intel PRO adapters:

Wired LAN adapters. This type of adapter connects to a network through an Ethernet network cable. Adapter Switching supports adapters in the PRO/100 family, including the PRO/100 Mobile Adapters. Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI adapter. This adapter send data to and from the network through the adapter's antenna. By default, adapter switching uses the wired Ethernet adapter when both wired and wireless adapters are present and working. If you detach the wired adapter, adapter switching automatically switches to the wireless adapter. When you attach an Ethernet cable again, adapter switching automatically switches back to the wired Ethernet connection. You can change your wireless preferences from the Advanced Settings dialog and prioritize your wireless and wired adapters from the Adapter Switching dialog. You can also install multiple wired adapters, or install two wireless adapters if the network supports both 802.11a and 802.11b wireless standards. Then when you detach the wired adapter, your computer uses the wireless adapter that gives the best data rate. Wireless Preferences One or more wired adapter and one or two wireless adapter can be installed in the same computer. Using the adapter switching feature, you can select your priority for a specific type of adapter, wired or wireless. If adapter switching is enabled, the installed adapters are selected from a preference list. To access the network preferences:

1. From the General page, select the wireless adapter on the left side pane. 2. Click the Networks tab. 3. Click the Advanced button. 4. Select your preferences from the options shown. 5. Click OK to save the settings and return to the Profiles dialog. Adapter Switching Considerations Consider the following issues when switching adapters:

Adapter switching requires the use of DHCP. It cannot be used with fixed IP addressing. Only Intel wired and wireless adapters are supported. Adapter switching cannot be used on a Virtual Private Network (VPN). Adapter switching should not be applied while an active data transfer is in progress. PROSet determines how many wireless adapters are present in the computer. PROSet supports simultaneous wireless adapter operation for the following:

o 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz installed adapters: Supports simultaneous operation in either o 2.4 GHz and 2.4 GHz installed adapters: Supports simultaneous operation where ad hoc or infrastructure mode. one adapter is in ad hoc mode and the other adapter is in infrastructure mode. Simultaneous operation with both adapters in infrastructure or ad hoc mode is not be supported. o The second adapter added is not supported. o 5 GHz and 5 GHz installed adapters: Supports simultaneous operation where one adapter is in ad hoc mode and the other adapter is in infrastructure mode. Simultaneous operation with both adapters in infrastructure mode or ad hoc is not supported. o The second adapter added is not supported. o Maximum of four adapters is supported. Switching Between 2.4 and 5 GHz Bands PROSet supports switching between 802.11a (5 GHz) and 802.11b (2.4 GHz) bands. Using the Advanced Settings options, you can define band priorities. Changing the Settings for Adapter Switching If you have two adapters installed, you can define the adapter to be used first. Adapter priorities can be set in the Adapter Switching dialog. To change the adapter switching settings:

1. From the General page, select the wireless adapter on the left side pane. 2. Click the Adapter Switching icon on the left side pane. 3. Click the Adapter Switching checkbox under the Settings heading. 4. Prioritize adapters in the lower adapter display list. Select an adapter in the Adapter Type list and use the up/down arrows on the left side of the dialog to arrange the adapters in priority. The adapter in the highest position is used first. 5. Click the adapter name that you want to use in the upper display list. The current adapter link status displays next to the adapter name. NOTE: One wireless adapter can be used for each band operating at a time. 6. After you have switched to the desired adapter, click OK to close the Adapter Switching dialog and return to the General tab. Back to Contents Page Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Security Overview Wireless Security Security Guidelines Protecting Your Network Wireless Security Since wireless networking devices transmit information through radio waves, it is imperative that you protect your information by configuring your security settings. There are three main components that, when used together, can protect your wireless network:

Service Set Identifier (SSID) The name of a device on a network, the SSID is the first level of security, but it is not fool-proof because the access points broadcast the SSIDs across a wireless network. This level of security is okay if you are on a peer-to-peer network without any access points, but for larger networks, more complex security measures should be put in place. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Supported by the IEEE 802.11 standard, WEP uses 64- or 128-bit encryption keys to encrypt data as it is sent or received by each client on a wireless network. The way these keys are authenticated determines the level of security on your wireless network. Using the default keys, however, makes your wireless network vulnerable and you should not use them. Authentication Server An authentication server works with each client to authenticate access with a session-specific WEP key. This type of server protects sensitive user and password information from intruders. Security Guidelines The following can help to achieve maximum security for your wireless network:

1. Enable WEP on your wireless network and change the WEP key daily or weekly. 2. Protect your drives and folders with passwords. 3. Change the default SSID. 4. Change the WEP key with each session, if possible. 5. Enable MAC address filtering, if possible. 6. Implement a Virtual Private Network (VPN) system to increase security. A VPN client is included in most operating systems. Protecting Your Network Authentication Types Encryption Keys WEP Encryption 802.1x IPSEC TKIP Virtual Private Networks Authentication Types The IEEE 802.1x standard provides a general authentication framework for 802 LANs and specifies an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to enable LAN transport for many different types of authentication protocols. Encryption Keys To protect client traffic, the 802.11 standard defines Wireless Encryption Privacy (WEP) with fixed encryption keys (and three optional key lengths). The use of fixed keys has made it easy to mount several types of attack against WEP. WEP Encryption You can prevent unauthorized reception of your wireless data using the IEEE 802.11 Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). The standard includes two levels of security, using a 64-bit key

(sometimes referred to as 40-bit) or a 128-bit key. For better security, use a 128-bit key. If you use encryption, all wireless devices on your WLAN must use the same encryption settings. Refer to Setting up WEP Encryption for more information. 802.1x A WAN client initiates an authorization request to the access point, which authenticates the client to an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) compliant RADIUS server. This RADIUS server may authenticate either the user (via passwords) or the machine (by MAC address). IPSEC Software based IPSEC transport security. TKIP (Temporal key Integrity Protocol) Uses an encryption method called fast-packet rekeying, that changes the encryption keys frequency. Virtual Private Networks (VPN) The following VPN client software is supported by PROSet. Refer to Virtual Private Network

(VPN) for more information. Netstructure VPN (SST) Netstructure VPN (IPsec-IKE) Cisco 3000 VPN Checkpoint VPN (Non office transparent mode, connect office mode and connect non-

office mode) Microsoftt VPN (L2TP over IPsec transport, L2TP for configuration with ESP-in-UDP) 802.11a and 802.11b can be augmented with VPN security to protect TCP/IP based services. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Setting Up WEP Encryption and Authentication Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption and shared authentication provides protect for your data on the network. WEP uses an encryption key to encrypt data before transmitting it. Only computers using the same encryption key can access the network or decrypt the encrypted data transmitted by other computers. Authentication provides an additional validation process from the adapter to the access point. Note: You must use the same encryption type, key index number, and WEP key as other devices on your wireless network. Also, if 802.1x authentication is being used, WEP encryption must be disabled. To enable 64-bit (40-bit) or 128-bit encryption with authentication:

1. Select the wireless adapter in the left-side pane. Wizard. 2. From the General page, click the Networks tab. 3. Select the profile from the Profile List and click the Edit button or click the Add button if you are using the Profile Wizard. 4. Click the Security tab. Select Security Settings, the third dialog if using the Profile 5. Select Shared from the Network Authentication drop-down box. 6. Select 64-bit or 128-bit from the Encryption Level drop-down box. 7. Select a key index number 1, 2, 3, or 4 from the Encrypt data with key index drop-down box to use for encryption. Key selection corresponds to the WEP encryption pass phrase or WEP key. 8. Select either of the following:

Pass phrase: Click Use Pass Phrase to enable it. Enter a text phrase, up to five (using 64-bit) or 13 (using 128-bit) alphanumeric characters

((0-9, a-z or A-Z), in the pass phrase field. WEP key: Click Use WEP Keys to enable it. Enter up to ten (using 64-

bit) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, A-F, or twenty-six (using 128-bit) alphanumeric characters, 0-9, A-F in the WEP key field. 9. Click OK to save the settings and return to the previous dialog. NOTE: You must use the same encryption type, index number, and WEP key as other devices on your wireless network. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Troubleshooting Problems with installation Before calling Customer Support Users are dropped from the wireless network Range decreases as data rate increases Signal doesn't pass through a short or thin wall Signal strength drops when a cell phone is used in area Range is shorter than it should be Interference from fluorescent lights When too much range is undesirable Prevent access to wireless networks from outside the building Problems with network connectivity Checking Adapter Statistics Problems with installation Windows does not detect the wireless adapter:

1. Remove and re-install the adapter. 2. Uninstall and reinstall the adapter's drivers. Before calling Customer Support Make a note of the following answers before calling customer support:

How many remote units do you have talking to each access point?

What channels are you using, and how are they dispersed?

How much coverage overlap is there between access points?

How high above the floor are the access points mounted?

What revision of Intel(R) PROSet software or other LAN software are you running?

What other electronic equipment is operating in the same band?

What construction materials are used in wall and floors?

Users are dropped from the wireless network Suggested causes and solutions:

Find out if a person or workgroup moved or if the building has been rearranged. If two or more users are seated too close to each other, performance can suffer. Instruct your users to space themselves a small distance apart to keep receivers from being overloaded. Delivery trucks with very large metal sides can affect performance by reflecting destructive signals back into a building. If you have an installation that includes a shipping dock, check to see if problem coincides with the arrival of large trucks. Personal systems can also interfere with your network. Wireless speakers, cordless earphones, some Bluetooth devices, and similar systems can be the source of an infrequent but hard to find the problem. Some systems do not conform to wireless regulations. Shut off suspect devices or remove them from the area. If possible, remove and reinstall your new software. Conflicts with other resident software packages are always a possibility, and they are not always the fault of the newest addition. Sometimes just starting over fixes the problem. Swap units around. Does your problem follow the changed units, or is it unique to a specific location? If it follows the product, the swapped unit could be damaged, or improperly configured. If the problem stays with the location, try to find out what is different about that particular room or area. Range decreases as data rate increases This is a normal condition. Range is inversely proportional to data rate: the faster the data, the shorter the range. This has to do with the modulation technology used. Very fast data rates require extremely complex signal waveforms, where even minor distortions can result in data errors. Slower data rates are much more tolerant, and consequently will get through even in the presence of some amount of noise, interference, distortion and echo. Signal doesn't pass through a short or thin wall Range is highly dependent on the physical environment. In a line-of-sight location, with elevated and calibrated antennas, range predictions are quite accurate. This is not true in a typical office building, where the walls may be simple drywall (which is almost transparent to microwaves), or could be plaster with metal underneath. Most sites are somewhere between these two extremes, and consist of a mixture of surfaces. You cant tell what is inside a wall by just looking at it, and we cant tell you exactly what distance you will achieve. Consider published range information to be typical, average, common or usual. Do not expect it to be exact. Signal strength drops when a cell phone is used in the area Range also depends on the electronic environment. If other equipment that could cause interference is nearby, the range of your transceiver could vary widely, and could change suddenly when the other equipment activates. This is particularly true for 802.11b installations, which share their frequencies with microwave ovens, cordless phones, wireless hi-fi speakers, electronics toys and similar devices. Try to keep your system away from other transmitters, and from other sources of electrical noise, such as large motors, spot welders, and similar electronically noisy devices. Range is shorter than it should be Repeat some tests late in the evening, or on a weekend, when there may be less interference. However, some users leave their networks turned all the time so this test is not foolproof. By all means, try more than one channel. Your range problem may just be a nearby user whose system uses your present test channel. Interference from fluorescent lights If you mount an access point close to fluorescent light fixtures, the lamp glow appears constant, but inside the lamp tube, ionization appears and disappears 120 times a second. This can modulate or chop an incoming signal and interfere with reception. When too much range is undesirable Too much range is not necessarily a good thing. At first it would appear that you would want as much range as possible, but with the increase in range comes an increase in interference potential, as your unit hears not only your other units but also manages to hear the systems of other companies up and down the street. If you have a large installation, you will also wind up with more than one access point using the same channel. If a remote unit hears two or more access points, this will slow the network network. Prevent access to wireless networks from outside the building Excess transmit range presents a special reverse problem. For example, putting an access point adjacent to a second floor bay window invites anyone with the right software on the street below to pick up and enjoy all network transmissions. We discuss some possible solutions to this problem further on. Problems with Network Connectivity If you cannot connect to the wireless network, try the following:

Check Network Settings 1. Select the wireless adapter in the PROSet left side pane. 2. From the General page, check that the Network Name (SSID) and operating mode are correct. If the laptop is configured for ad hoc networking, make sure that the channel is correct. 3. To correct these settings, click the Networks tab. 4. Select the profile being used. 5. Click the Edit button and make the changes. Check Security Settings 1. Select the wireless adapter in the PROSet left side pane. 2. From the General page, check that the security settings are correct. 3. To correct the security settings, click the Networks tab. 4. Select the profile being used. 5. Click the Edit button. 6. Click the Security tab. Make sure that the settings for WEP encryption are correct. Check Adapter Switching 1. Select the wireless adapter in the PROSet left side pane. 2. Select the Adapter Switching icon. 3. Check that the adapter is "Linked" to the network. Checking Adapter Statistics Adapter Statistics If the adapter is communicating with an access point (infrastructure mode) or other computers in peer-to-peer mode, click the Statistics button in the Troubleshooting tab to display the current information about how well the adapter is transmitting and receiving information. Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Specifications Intel(R) PRO/Wireless Mini PCI Adapter

(Models WM3B7100, WM3A7100 WM3B2100, and WM3A2100) Physical Characteristics Form Factor Dimensions (HxWxD) Mini PCI Type Type 3B card: 2.34 in x 1.75 in x 0.20 in (59.45 mm x 44.45 mm x 5 mm) 0.6 oz (17 g) Weight Antenna Interface Connector Hirose U.FL., Coax, surface-mount connectors Dual Diversity Antenna Connector Interface Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency and Modulation Frequency band Modulation On-board dual diversity switching 124-pin Mini-PCI 0 to +65 Celsius 10 to 90% non-condensing 2.4 GHz to 2.48 GHz CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 802.11b 802.11a 5.15 GHz to 5.85 GHz BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) 5 GHz UNII 8 non-overlapping; 4 non-overlapping (Japan and selected other countries) 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 40 ft (12m) @ 54 Mbps /

300 ft (91 m) @ 6 Mbps 100 ft (30 m) @ 54 Mbps

/ 1000 ft (305 m) @ 6 Mbps 50 mW 450-480 mA 420-440 mA 30 mA 3.3 V Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) 3 non-overlapping 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 100 ft (30 m) @ 11 Mbps

/ 200 ft (60 m) @ 1 Mbps 350 ft (105 m) @ 11 Mbps / 1100 ft (325 m)

@ 1 Mbps 35 mW 200-385 mA 150-350 mA 65 mA typical 3.3 V Wireless Medium Channels Range and Throughput Data Rates Indoor Range Outdoor Range Power Output Power Transmit Receive Sleep Voltage Windows* XP, 2000, 98SE, Me Pending certification of interoperability test and logo program by WECA Yes Windows* XP, 2000, 98SE, Me Pending ratification of interoperability test and logo program by WECA Yes IEEE 802.11a and IEEE 802.11b Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) 802.11a and 802.11b compliant for seamless roaming between respective access points (802.11a, 802.11b, dual-mode 802.11a/11b) 0-bit, 64-bit (also called 40-bit), and 128-bit WEP CSMA/CA Compatibility Operating System WECA WHQL Network WLAN Standard Architecture Roaming Security Encryption Quality of Service DCF Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Glossary Numerical A B D E F I K M O P R S T U W Numerical 802.11 x: A series of IEEE specifications for LANs: currently 802.11b, 802.11a, and 802.11g. Using any one of these extensions to the 802.11 standard permits wireless communication between a client and an access point or between two clients. The various specifications govern transmission speeds and radio frequencies as well as fall-back rates and other characteristics. The upcoming standard 802.11i will provide additional security specific to WLANs, and 802.11e will address quality of service. A Access Point: A device that serves as a communications hub for wireless clients and provides a connection to a wired LAN. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES): A federal information-processing standard, supporting 128-, 192-, and 256-bit keys. B Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID): A unique identifier for each wireless client on a wireless network. The BSSID is the Ethernet MAC address of each adapter on the network. Bit Rate: The total number of bits (ones and zeros) per second that a network connection can support. Note that this bit rate will vary, under software control, with different signal path conditions. Bluetooth: An incompatible, very short-range lower speed communications system (PAN), developed first in Europe as a cable replacement for printers and similar peripheral connections. Its usage has expanded to include cordless earphones and similar devices. It uses the 2.4 GHz ISM band, and co-exists with 802.11b. Here the term, co-exist means that not all researchers agree on the amount of mutual interference generated when both systems operate in the same location. Broadcast SSID: Used to allow an access point to respond to clients on a wireless network by sending probes. D Data Rate (Information Rate): Not all bits carry user information. Each group (packet) of bits contains headers, trailers, echo control, destination information, and other data required by the transmission protocol. It is important to understand the difference between bit rate and data rate, since the overhead information may consume more than 40% of the total transmission. This difference is common to many such data systems, including Ethernet. Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Frequency-Hop Spread Spectrum (FHSS):

Two incompatible technologies used in radio transmission. E Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP): An authentication protocol that supports multiple authentication methods, such as Kerberos, passwords, or smart cards. Cisco's authentication protocol, LEAP, is based on EAP, an extension to PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol). Encryption: Scrambling data so that only the authorized recipient can read it. Usually a key is needed to decrypt the data. Extended Service Set IDentifier (ESSID): A type of unique identifier applied to both the AP and the wireless PC Card that is attached to each packet. This allows the AP to recognize each wireless client and its traffic. F Frequencies: Strike a piano key and you generate a tone. Pick up the tone with a microphone and your tone turns in to a vibrating or cycling electronic signal. The rate of vibration depends on the key struck. In electronics we refer to this rate of vibration as the number of cycles per second. The formal term for this value is Hertz. As we move up in rate, such as in the Broadcast Band, we can use Kilohertz (KHz) to represent 1,000 Hz, or Megahertz (MHz) to represent 1,000,000 Hz. Continuing much further upward, we finally reach 1,000,000,000 Hz, which we can fortunately shorten to a Gigahertz (GHz). These frequencies are the home of both 802.11a (5 GHz) and 802.11b (2.4 GHz). I Independent Basic Service Set Identifier (IBSSID): Used to identify a wireless network configured to allow each wireless client to communicate directly with each other without an access point. Independent Network: A network that provides (usually temporarily) peer-to-peer connectivity without relying on a complete network infrastructure. Infrastructure Mode: A wireless network centered around an access point. In this environment, the access point not only provides communication with the wired network but also mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): An organization involved in setting computing and communications standards. ISM Bands: A series of frequency bands, set aside by the FCC for Industrial, Scientific and Medical applications. Users of these bands operate equipment on a shared basis, meaning that they must expect, and accept interference from other legal users. Products manufactured for ISM Band use must be approved by the FCC, but the user does not have to be licensed. In addition to WLAN, ISM bands support cordless phones, microwave ovens, baby monitors, toys, ham radio transceivers, and other wireless services. K Kerberos: An authentication system enabling protected communication over an open network using a unique key called a ticket. M Media Access Control (MAC) Address: A hardwired address applied at the factory. It uniquely identifies network hardware, such as a wireless PC Card, on a LAN or WAN. Microcell: A bounded physical space in which a number of wireless devices can communicate. Because it is possible to have overlapping cells as well as isolated cells, the boundaries of the cell are established by some rule or convention. Microwave: Technically, the term describes any frequency above 1.0 GHz. Unfortunately the advertising industry has contorted this meaning considerably. In our discussion we will stick to the technical definition. Multipath: The signal variation caused when radio signals take multiple paths from transmitter to receiver. O Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM): A modulation technique for transmitting large amounts of digital data over radio waves. 802.11a uses OFDM, as will 802.11g. P Peer-to-Peer Mode: A wireless network structure that allows wireless clients to communicate with each other without using an access point. Personal Area Network (PAN):

Peripheral Connect Interface (PCI):

Preamble: A preliminary signal transmitted over a WLAN to control signal detection and clock synchronization. R Radio Frequency (RF) Terms (GHz, MHz, Hz): The international unit for measuring frequency is Hertz (Hz), which is equivalent to the older unit of cycles per second. One Mega-Hertz (MHz) is one million Hertz. One Giga-Hertz (GHz) is one billion Hertz. For reference: the standard US electrical power frequency is 60 Hz, the AM broadcast radio frequency band is 0.55 -1.6 MHz, the FM broadcast radio frequency band is 88-108 MHz, and microwave ovens typically operate at 2.45 GHz. Range: The distance over which a given system can communicate. This subject is discussed in detail below. RC4: An encryption algorithm designed at RSA Laboratories; specifically, a stream cipher of pseudo-random bytes that is used in WEP encryption. Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RAID): An authentication and accounting system that verifies users' credentials and grants access to requested resources. Roaming: Movement of a wireless node between two microcells. Roaming usually occurs in infrastructure networks built around multiple access points. S Service Set Identifier (SSID): Used to identify clients on a wireless network. Shared key An encryption key known only to the receiver and sender of data. Site Survey: A process where you set up one transceiver in a fixed location, and then use another unit to plot the field strength of the first units transmitted signal. By moving the transmitter around, and repeating the plots, you can develop a plan as to the best locations for access points. You will also identify dead zones and other areas in need of special attention. This can be a long, slow process, but it beats ripping up an unsatisfactory installation and starting over. These tests require special software commands. Refer to your manual for specific instructions. If you have a very large, or unusually complex installation situation, you might want to consider calling in professionals to do your survey. We are not permitted to suggest installer names, but you can check your yellow pages or similar sources for likely candidates. T TKPIL:

Transceiver: A commonly used term that describes a combination transmitter and receiver. Both 802.11a and 802.11b devices would be properly described as data transceivers. U UNII Bands: Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure. In contrast to the ISM bands, these are a group of frequency bands set aside by the FCC for WLAN type communications only. Users must accept interference from other legal WLAN users, but the other sources of interference problems are, or legally should be, missing. W WECA: The Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance... WEP64 and WEP128: Wired Equivalent Privacy, 64 bit and 128 bit (64 bit is sometimes referred to as 40 bit). This is a low-level encryption technique designed to give the user about the same amount of privacy that he would expect from a LAN. It is extremely important to understand that WEP is not some CIA-proof supercode! It performs as intended, giving the user a simple level of data security and protection from casual electronic eavesdropping. Use of the 128 bit option at all possible times is recommended. Remember that 802.11 devices transmit (broadcast) in all directions, and that it is possible, with very complex software, to copy and decode WEP transmissions. The task is not trivial, but it is possible. If your data is extremely sensitive, you should consider some form of secondary protection, such as strong passwords and an additional level of encryption. Suitable software packages are available from reputable suppliers. Although not intended by the original architects, WEP also prevents unauthorized access to your system by an outsider. Hackers have been known to access systems from outside a building, and to then to access the Web for a leisurely session, all at the system owners expense. Wide Area Network (WAN):

Wireless: A microwave transceiver system. Wireless LAN (WLAN):

Wireless Node: A user computer with a wireless network interface card (adapter). Back to Contents Please read all Restrictions and Disclaimers. Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Customer Support Intel support is available online or by telephone. Available services include the most up-to-date product information, installation instructions about specific products, and troubleshooting tips. Online Support Technical Support: http://support.intel.com Network Product Support: http://www.intel.com/network Gigabit Product Support: http://www.intel.com/network/solutions/gigabit.htm Corporate Web Site: http://www.intel.com Telephone Support US and Canada: 1-916-377-7000 (7:00 - 17:00, Monday through Friday, Pacific Time) Global: Intel has technical support centers all over the world. Many of the centers are staffed by technicians who speak the native languages. For a list of all Intel support centers, as well as their telephone numbers and business hours, visit http://www.intel.com/support/9089.htm. Back to Contents Please read all Restrictions and Disclaimers. Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Products Software License Agreement INTEL SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT - READ BEFORE COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING Do not use or load this software and any associated materials (collectively, the

"Software") until you have carefully read the following terms and conditions. By loading or using the Software, you agree to the terms of this Agreement. If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, do not install or use the Software. LICENSE. You may copy the Software onto a single computer for your personal, non-commercial use, and you may make one back-up copy of the Software, subject to these conditions:

You may not copy, modify, rent, sell, distribute or transfer any part of the This Software is licensed for use only in conjunction with Intel 1. component products. Use of the Software in conjunction with non-Intel component products is not licensed hereunder. 2. Software except as provided in this Agreement, and you agree to prevent unauthorized copying of the Software. 3. 4. than one user. 5. some of which may be identified in, and licensed in accordance with, any enclosed

"license.txt" file or other text or file. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software. You may not sublicense or permit simultaneous use of the Software by more The Software may contain the software or other property of third party suppliers, OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE AND COPYRIGHTS. Title to all copies of the Software remains with Intel or its suppliers. The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of the United States and other countries, and international treaty provisions. You may not remove any copyright notices from the Software. Intel may make changes to the Software, or to items referenced therein, at any time without notice, but is not obligated to support or update the Software. Except as otherwise expressly provided, Intel grants no express or implied right under Intel patents, copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property rights. You may transfer the Software only if the recipient agrees to be fully bound by these terms and if you retain no copies of the Software. LIMITED MEDIA WARRANTY. If the Software has been delivered by Intel on physical media, Intel warrants the media to be free from material physical defects for a period of ninety (90) days after delivery by Intel. If such a defect is found, return the media to Intel for replacement or alternate delivery of the Software as Intel may select. EXCLUSION OF OTHER WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any information, text, graphics, links or other items contained within the Software. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOST INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS PROHIBIT EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. Intel may terminate this Agreement at any time if you violate its terms. Upon termination, you will immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Intel. APPLICABLE LAWS. Claims arising under this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of California, excluding its principles of conflict of laws and the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the Sale of Goods. You may not export the Software in violation of applicable export laws and regulations. Intel is not obligated under any other agreements unless they are in writing and signed by an authorized representative of Intel. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software is provided with "RESTRICTED RIGHTS." Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR52.227-14 and DFAR252.227-7013 et seq. or their successors. Use of the Software by the Government constitutes acknowledgment of Intel's proprietary rights therein. Contractor or Manufacturer is Intel Corporation, 2200 Mission College Blvd., Santa Clara, CA 95052. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapters Safety and Regulatory Notices This document contains general safety and regulatory notices applicable to the following product. Detailed regulatory information is supplied as part of the user information for each product. Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 7100 3B Mini PCI Adapter (model WM3B7100) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 7100 3A Mini PCI Adapter (model WM3A7100) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 2100 3B Mini PCI Adapter (model WM3B2100) Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 2100 3A Mini PCI Adapter (model WM3A2100) Safety Notices Local Restrictions on 802.11a and 802.11b Radio Usage Safety Notices The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The Intel PRO/Wireless LAN Mini PCI products meet the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. Use in specific environments:

o The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints o The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation posed by the safety directors of such environments. Administration (FAA). o The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Antenna use:

o In order to comply with FCC RF exposure limits, low gain integrated antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) or more from the body of all persons. o High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 30 cm

(12 inches) or more from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements. Explosive Device Proximity Warning (see below) Antenna Warning (see below) Use on Aircraft Caution (see below) Other Wireless Devices (see below) Power Supply (Access Point) (see below) Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is recommended for the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN 7100 3B Mini PCI Adapter installed in a desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is positioned closer than 20 cm (8 inches). Warning: Intel(R) PRO/Wireless LAN products are not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use of such antennas with these products is illegal. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a and 802.11b Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a and 802.11b wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a and 802.11b products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from the permissible settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. For country-specific information, see the additional compliance information supplied with the product. Back to Contents Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Limited Lifetime Hardware Warranty Intel warrants to the original owner that the adapter product delivered in this package will be free from defects in material and workmanship. This warranty does not cover the adapter product if it is damaged in the process of being installed or improperly used. THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF NONINFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARISING OUT OF ANY PROPOSAL, SPECIFICATION, OR SAMPLE. This warranty does not cover replacement of adapter products damaged by abuse, accident, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, disaster, improper installation, or improper testing. If the adapter product is found to be defective, Intel, at its option, will replace or repair the hardware product at no charge except as set forth below, or refund your purchase price provided that you deliver the adapter product along with a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number (see below), along with proof of purchase (if not registered), either to the dealer from whom you purchased it or to Intel with an explanation of any deficiency. If you ship the adapter product, you must assume the risk of damage or loss in transit. You must use the original container (or the equivalent) and pay the shipping charge. Intel may replace or repair the adapter product with either new or reconditioned parts, and any adapter product, or part thereof replaced by Intel becomes Intel's property. Repaired or replaced adapter products will be returned to you at the same revision level as received or higher, at Intel's option. Intel reserves the right to replace discontinued adapter products with an equivalent current generation adapter product. Returning a Defective Product From North America:

Before returning any adapter product, contact Intel Customer Support and obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number by calling +1 916-377-7000. If the Customer Support Group verifies that the adapter product is defective, they will have the RMA department issue you an RMA number to place on the outer package of the adapter product. Intel cannot accept any product without an RMA number on the package. All other locations:

Return the adapter product to the place of purchase for a refund or replacement. Intel Adapter Money-back Guarantee (North America Only) Intel wants you to be completely satisfied with the Intel adapter product that you have purchased. Any time within ninety (90) days of purchase, you may return your Intel adapter to the original place of purchase for a full refund of the purchase price from your dealer. Resellers and distributors, respectively, accepting returns and refunding money back to their customers may return Intel adapters to their original place of purchase. Intel guarantees that it will accept returns under this policy and refund the original purchase price to customers purchasing directly from Intel. Limitation of Liability and Remedies INTEL'S SOLE LIABILITY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO DIRECT, OBJECTIVELY MEASURABLE DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT OR SPECULATIVE DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, AND SPECIAL DAMAGES) INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, REPROCUREMENT COSTS, LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, LOSS OF GOODWILL, AND LOSS OF PROFITS, WHETHER ANY SUCH DAMAGES ARISE OUT OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE, TORT, OR UNDER ANY WARRANTY, IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER INTEL HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, INTEL'S TOTAL LIABILITY FOR ALL CLAIMS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THESE LIMITATIONS ON POTENTIAL LIABILITIES WERE AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT IN SETTING THE PRODUCT PRICE. INTEL NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANYONE TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITIES. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. Critical Control Applications: Intel specifically disclaims liability for use of the adapter product in critical control applications (including, for example only, safety or health care control systems, nuclear energy control systems, or air or ground traffic control systems) by Licensee or Sublicensees, and such use is entirely at the user's risk. Licensee agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold Intel harmless from and against any and all claims arising out of use of the adapter product in such applications by Licensee or Sublicensees. Software: Software provided with the adapter product is not covered under the hardware warranty described above. See the applicable software license agreement which shipped with the adapter product for details on any software warranty. Back to Contents Please read all Restrictions and Disclaimers. Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Back to Contents Legal Information Copyright (C) 2001-2002, Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein.

*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel(R) is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Back to Contents Please read all Restrictions and Disclaimers. Copyright 2002 Intel Corporation. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, (example - use only shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices) any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. IMPORTANT NOTE:

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:

1) The antenna must be installed such that 20 cm is maintained between the antenna and users, and 2) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. As long as the 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter testing will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed (for example, digital device emissions, PC peripheral requirements, etc.). IMPORTANT NOTE: In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the FCC authorization is no longer considered valid and the FCC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and Obtaining a separate FCC authorization. End Product Labelling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in devices where the antenna may be installed such that 20 cm may be maintained between the antenna and users (for example access points, routers, wireless ASDL modems, and Notebook ). The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains TX FCC ID: HFSWM3B2100 . Manual Information That Must be Included The users manual for end users must include the following information in a prominent location IMPORTANT NOTE: To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, the antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Contents 1 Checking Out Your Gateway M275 . 1 Front . 2 Left Side . 3 Right Side . 5 Back . 6 Bottom . 7 Keyboard area . 8 Identifying your model . 10 Gateway model number . 10 Gateway serial number . 11 Internal wireless label . 11 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity . 11 Finding your specifications . 12 Accessories . 13 2 Getting Started. 15 Safety instructions . 16 General tips . 16 Using the battery . 17 Using the AC adapter . 17 Basic safety precautions . 18 Connecting the AC adapter . 19 Protecting from power source problems . 21 Starting your convertible tablet PC . 22 Waking up your convertible tablet PC . 23 Turning off your convertible tablet PC . 23 Restarting (rebooting) your convertible tablet PC . 24 Status indicators . 25 LCD panel status indicators . 25 Keyboard status indicators . 27 Using the keyboard . 28 Key types . 29 System key combinations . 30 Buttons . 32 LCD panel buttons . 32 Multi-function buttons . 33 Using the EZ Pad touchpad . 35 Using the touchpad . 36 Using the display . 38 i Converting the display from notebook to tablet mode . 39 Using the pen . 41 Storing and removing the pen . 41 Calibration . 42 Gestures . 43 Pen button . 44 Tips . 44 Tablet Input Panel (TIP) . 44 Using speech recognition . 46 Connecting the modem . 47 Connecting to a wired Ethernet network . 48 Broadband Internet connections . 49 Installing a printer, scanner, or other peripheral device . 49 3 Getting Help . 51 Help and Support . 52 Searching for a topic . 52 Do More With Gateway . 53 Online help . 54 Gateway Web site . 55 Using eSupport . 55 4 Windows Basics . 57 About Windows XP tablet PC Edition . 58 About the Windows environment . 59 Using the desktop . 60 Using the Start menu . 60 Adding icons to the desktop . 61 Identifying window items . 62 Working with files and folders . 64 Viewing drives . 64 Creating folders . 65 Copying and moving files and folders . 66 Deleting files and folders . 68 Browsing for files and folders . 70 Searching for files . 71 Using the Windows Search utility . 72 Working with documents . 74 Creating a new document . 74 Saving a document . 75 Opening a document . 76 Printing a document . 77 Keyboard shortcuts . 78 ii 5 Using the Internet. 79 Learning about the Internet . 80 Setting up an Internet account . 81 Accessing your Internet account . 82 Using the World Wide Web . 83 Connecting to a Web site . 84 Downloading files . 85 Using e-mail . 86 Sending e-mail . 86 Checking your e-mail . 87 6 Sending and Receiving Faxes . 89 Installing and configuring Fax . 90 Installing Fax . 90 Configuring Fax . 91 Sending a simple fax . 93 Setting up your cover page template . 95 Faxing from programs . 96 Faxing a scanned document . 96 Receiving and viewing a fax . 97 Canceling a fax . 97 Automatically retry sending a fax . 98 Automatically cancelling a fax . 99 7 Using Multimedia . 101 Adjusting the volume . 102 Recording and playing audio . 105 Playing audio and video files with the Windows Media Player . 107 Using S/PDIF digital audio . 108 Changing modules . 110 Using the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive . 112 Identifying drive types . 112 Inserting a CD or DVD . 113 Listening to CDs . 114 Listening to CDs . 114 Using MUSICMATCH . 116 Playing CDs . 116 Creating MP3 music files . 118 Editing track information . 120 Building a music library . 121 Changing the music library display settings . 122 Listening to Internet radio . 123 iii Using advanced features . 123 Playing a DVD . 124 Creating CDs using Roxio Easy CD Creator . 125 Creating data CDs . 125 Creating music CDs . 130 Copying CDs . 134 Creating CDs using Nero Express . 136 Creating a data CD . 138 Copying a CD . 142 Copying music tracks . 145 Creating a music CD . 148 Advanced features . 152 Using the optional diskette drive . 152 Using the memory card reader . 154 Memory card types . 154 Using a memory card . 155 Connecting a digital camera . 156 Connecting a digital video camera . 158 Editing videos . 159 Viewing the display on a projector or monitor . 160 Viewing the display on a television . 162 Changing from one display to another . 165 8 Managing Power. 167 Monitoring the battery charge . 168 Recharging the battery . 169 Recalibrating the battery . 170 Changing batteries . 171 Replacing the main battery . 172 Installing a secondary battery . 174 Extending battery life . 176 Conserving battery power . 176 Using alternate power sources . 176 Changing power modes . 177 Changing power settings . 178 Changing the power scheme . 179 Changing alarm options . 180 Changing advanced settings . 181 Activating and using Hibernate mode . 182 9 Traveling With Your Gateway M275. 185 Packing your convertible tablet PC . 186 Traveling by air . 186 iv Modem . 186 Radio frequency wireless connections . 187 Files . 187 Security . 188 Power . 189 Additional tips . 189 10 Customizing Your Gateway M275 . 191 Using the display . 192 Changing display orientation . 192 Adjusting brightness . 192 Adjusting the screen and desktop settings . 193 Adjusting the color depth . 193 Adjusting the screen resolution . 195 Changing the colors on your Windows desktop . 196 Changing the desktop background . 197 Selecting a screen saver . 199 Adjusting tablet and pen settings . 200 Programming the buttons . 201 Adjusting the Tablet PC Input Panel Settings . 202 Changing the touchpad settings . 203 Adding and modifying user accounts . 205 11 Networking Your Gateway M275 . 207 Benefits of networking . 208 Sharing a single Internet connection . 208 Sharing drives . 208 Sharing peripheral devices . 209 Streaming audio and video files . 209 Playing multi-player games . 209 Selecting a network connection . 210 Wired Ethernet network . 210 Wireless Ethernet network . 210 Using a wired Ethernet network . 211 Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, or Gigabit Ethernet . 211 Example wired Ethernet network . 212 Equipment you need for a wired Ethernet network . 213 Using a wireless Ethernet network . 214 Wireless Ethernet speed and frequency . 215 Example access point wireless Ethernet network . 216 Equipment you need for an access point wireless Ethernet network . 217 Example peer-to-peer wireless Ethernet network . 218 Equipment you need for a peer-to-peer wireless Ethernet network . 219 v For more information . 219 Using your convertible tablet PC on a network . 220 Installing and configuring your convertible tablet PC for Ethernet networking 220 Turning your wireless Ethernet emitter on or off . 220 12 Moving From Your Old Computer . 221 Using the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard . 222 Transferring files . 222 Finding your files . 222 Transferring Internet settings . 224 Setting up your ISP . 224 Transferring your e-mail and address book . 225 Transferring your Internet shortcuts . 225 Installing your old printer or scanner . 225 Installing a USB printer or scanner . 226 Installing a parallel port printer . 226 Installing your old programs . 227 13 Maintaining Your Gateway M275. 229 Caring for your convertible tablet PC . 230 Display screen . 230 Pen . 231 Maintenance schedule . 232 Protecting your convertible tablet PC from viruses . 233 Managing hard drive space . 236 Checking hard drive space . 236 Using Disk Cleanup . 237 Checking the hard drive for errors . 238 Defragmenting the hard drive . 240 Backing up files . 242 Using the Scheduled Task Wizard . 242 Cleaning your convertible tablet PC . 244 Cleaning the exterior . 244 Cleaning the keyboard . 245 Cleaning the convertible tablet PC screen . 245 Cleaning the mouse . 245 14 Restoring Software . 247 Using the Restoration CDs . 248 Reinstalling device drivers . 249 Updating device drivers . 251 Reinstalling programs . 252 vi Reinstalling Windows . 254 15 Upgrading Your Gateway M275 . 257 Adding and removing a PC Card . 258 Preventing static electricity discharge . 260 Adding or replacing memory . 261 Adding or replacing memory in the memory bay . 262 Replacing memory under the keyboard . 265 Replacing the hard drive kit . 273 16 Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator . 277 Front . 278 Left side . 279 Back . 280 Connecting to the port replicator . 282 Attaching to the port replicator . 282 Disconnecting from the port replicator . 283 Securing your port replicator . 284 17 Troubleshooting . 285 Safety guidelines . 286 First steps . 287 Software support tools . 287 Troubleshooting . 288 Audio . 288 Battery . 288 Device installation . 288 Diskette drive (external) . 289 Display . 290 DVD or DVD/CD-RW drives . 291 File management . 293 Hard drive . 294 Interface/Ports . 295 Internet . 295 Keyboard . 297 Memory . 297 Memory card reader . 298 Modem (dial-up) . 298 Mouse . 302 Networks . 303 Operating system . 303 Passwords . 304 vii PC Cards . 304 Pen . 304 Power . 305 Printer . 307 Sound . 308 Touchpad . 309 Video . 309 Telephone support . 310 Before calling Gateway Technical Support . 310 Telephone numbers . 311 Tutoring and training . 312 Self-help . 312 Tutoring . 312 Training . 313 A Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information. 315 Index. 327 viii Checking Out Your Gateway M275 1 This chapter introduces you to the basic features of your convertible tablet PC. Read this chapter to learn:

How to identify the features of your Gateway convertible tablet PC How to locate your convertible tablet PCs model and serial number How to locate the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity How to locate the specifications for your convertible tablet PC What accessories are available for your convertible tablet PC Tips & Tricks You can download an electronic copy of this guide from support.gateway.com/support/manlib/. 1 Chapter 1: Checking Out Your Gateway M275 Front Component Modular bay Modular bay LCD panel release latch Icon Description Use this bay for a DVD drive, combination DVD/CD-RW drive, or a secondary battery. For more information, see Changing modules on page 110. To determine the type of drive in the modular bay, examine the drive trays plastic cover and compare the logo to those listed in Identifying drive types on page 112. Important: Your convertible tablet PC may have come with an optical drive module (such as a DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive), a secondary battery module, or any combination of these modules. To order a different module, visit the Accessory Store at accessories.gateway.com. LCD panel release latch Open the LCD panel by pressing the release latch. 2 www.gateway.com Left Side Left Side Kensington lock slot PC Card slot Memory card reader Power switch Speaker IEEE 1394 port Microphone jack Headphone jack Component Icon Description Kensington lock slot PC Card slot Memory card reader IEEE 1394 port Microphone jack Secure your convertible tablet PC to an object by connecting a Kensington cable lock to this slot. Insert one Type II PC Card into this slot. For more information, see Adding and removing a PC Card on page 258. Insert a memory card from a digital camera, MP3 player, PDA, or cellular telephone into the memory card reader. For more information, see Using the memory card reader on page 154. Plug an IEEE 1394 (also known as Firewire or i.Link) device (such as a digital camcorder, Iomega Zip drive, or MP3 player) into this 4-pin IEEE 1394 port. For more information, see Connecting a digital video camera on page 158. Plug a microphone into this jack. The built-in microphone is turned off when a microphone is plugged into this jack. For the location of your built-in microphone, see Keyboard area on page 8. www.gateway.com 3 Chapter 1: Checking Out Your Gateway M275 Component Headphone jack Power switch Speaker Icon Description Plug amplified speakers or headphones into this jack. The built-in speakers are turned off when speakers or headphones are plugged into this jack. Slide to turn the power on or off. You can also configure the power switch for Standby/Resume mode. For more information on configuring the power switch mode, see Changing power settings on page 178. Provides audio output when headphones or amplified speakers are not plugged into your convertible tablet PC or port replicator. 4 www.gateway.com Right Side Right Side Pen Speaker Modem jack Kensington lock slot Component Pen Speaker Modem jack Icon Description Write, tap, and input directly on your convertible tablet PCs display using the cordless pen. Provides audio output when headphones or amplified speakers are not plugged into your convertible tablet PC or port replicator. Plug a modem cable into this jack. For more information, see Connecting the modem on page 47. Kensington lock slot Secure your convertible tablet PC to an object by connecting a Kensington cable lock to this slot. www.gateway.com 5 Chapter 1: Checking Out Your Gateway M275 Back Ventilation fan USB port Docking port Ethernet jack Power connector Status indicators Monitor port USB port Component Ventilation fan USB ports Monitor port Docking port Ethernet jack Power connector Status indicators Icon Description Helps cool internal components. Do not block or insert objects into these slots. Plug USB (Universal Serial Bus) devices (such as a diskette drive, flash drive, Iomega Zip drive, printer, scanner, camera, keyboard, or mouse) into these ports. Plug an analog VGA monitor into this port. Connect the port replicator to this port. Warning! Power is passed through this port. This docking connection is certified to UL 1950 for use only with port replicators designed for your Gateway convertible tablet PC. Plug a 10/100 Ethernet network cable into this jack. For more information, see Connecting to a wired Ethernet network on page 48 and Networking Your Gateway M275 on page 207. Plug the AC adapter cable into this connector. Inform you of the power status or when a drive is in use. For more information, see LCD panel status indicators on page 25. 6 www.gateway.com Bottom System label Reset hole Memory bay cover Bottom Pen latch Battery latch Battery bay Hard drive bay Component Icon Description System label Reset hole Memory bay cover Pen latch Battery latch Battery bay Includes the product model number. For more information, see Identifying your model on page 10. Insert a straightened paper clip into this hole to manually restart your convertible tablet PC. Open this cover to install a memory module. For more information, see Adding or replacing memory on page 261. Slide to release the pen. Slide to release the battery. Insert the battery into this bay. For more information, see Changing batteries on page 171. Hard drive bay The hard drive is located in this bay. For more information, see Replacing the hard drive kit on page 273. www.gateway.com 7 Chapter 1: Checking Out Your Gateway M275 Keyboard area For information on using your keyboard, see Using the keyboard on page 28. Microphone LCD panel multi-function buttons/status indicators Keyboard Keyboard multi-function buttons/status indicators Component Microphone LCD panel status indicators LCD panel buttons Touchpad Icon Description Record audio through this microphone. The built-in microphone is turned off while an external microphone is connected. For the location of your microphone jack, see Left Side on page 3 and Back on page 280. Inform you of the power status or when a drive is in use. For more information, see LCD panel status indicators on page 25. See LCD panel buttons on page 32 for a description of each button. 8 www.gateway.com Keyboard area Component Keyboard Touchpad Keyboard Multi-function buttons Keyboard Status indicators Icon Description Provides all the features of a full-sized 86-key keyboard. For more information, see Using the keyboard on page 28. Provides all the functionality of a mouse. For more information, see Using the EZ Pad touchpad on page 35. Press these buttons to open programs assigned to them. These buttons are set to open your default e-mail program, your default Web browser, online help, and the My Computer window. For more information, see Multi-function buttons on page 33. Inform you when a button has been pressed that affects how the keyboard is used. For more information, see Keyboard status indicators on page 27. www.gateway.com 9 Chapter 1: Checking Out Your Gateway M275 Identifying your model Important The labels shown in this section are for informational purposes only. Label information varies by model, features ordered, and location. Gateway model number The label on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC contains information that identifies your convertible tablet PC model and its features. Gateway Technical Support will need this information if you call for assistance. Gateway model number Insert Picture Here 10 www.gateway.com Identifying your model Gateway serial number You can locate the Gateway serial number:

Printed on a white sticker on the bottom or back of your convertible tablet PC. Printed on the customer invoice that came with your convertible tablet PC. The invoice also contains your customer ID number. Internal wireless label A label similar to the following indicates your convertible tablet PC contains a wireless communications device. The label is located on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity The Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label found on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC includes the product key code for your operating system. www.gateway.com 11 Chapter 1: Checking Out Your Gateway M275 Finding your specifications For more information about your convertible tablet PC, such as memory size, memory type, and hard drive size, visit Gateways eSupport page at support.gateway.com. The eSupport page also has links to additional Gateway documentation and detailed specifications. For more information, see Using eSupport on page 55. 12 www.gateway.com Accessories Accessories Gateway offers accessories that can help you make the most of using your convertible tablet PC. To order accessories, visit the Accessory Store at accessories.gateway.com. Batteries and automobile/airplane power adapters If you run your convertible tablet PC on battery power for extended periods, you may want to buy an additional battery so you can swap batteries when necessary. See Replacing the main battery on page 172 for more information about using an additional main battery and Installing a secondary battery on page 174 for more information about using a secondary battery in your convertible tablet PC. With an automobile/airplane power adapter, you can save battery power by plugging your convertible tablet PC into an automobile cigarette lighter or an airplane in-flight power receptacle. Carrying cases Gateway has large-capacity carrying cases if you need additional space for accessories or supplies. Drives Use a diskette drive or USB flash drive for storing files or transferring files to another computer. See Using the optional diskette drive on page 152. Memory Large programs, such as multimedia games or graphics programs, use a lot of memory. If your programs are running more slowly than you think they should, try adding more memory. See Adding or replacing memory on page 261 for more information. Peripheral devices You can attach devices (such as a keyboard, mouse, printer, monitor, or diskette drive) to your convertible tablet PC. Port replicators Although you can attach devices directly to your convertible tablet PC, a port replicator lets you make all of those connections at one time. When you travel with your convertible tablet PC, you merely disconnect from the port replicator instead of unplugging all the devices. www.gateway.com 13 Chapter 1: Checking Out Your Gateway M275 A port replicator also provides additional ports and other expansion features not included with your convertible tablet PC. See Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator on page 277 for more information about using a port replicator with your convertible tablet PC. Printers You can attach almost any type of printer to your convertible tablet PC. The most common types are inkjet and laser printers, which print in color or black and white. See Installing a printer, scanner, or other peripheral device on page 49 for more information about attaching a printer to your convertible tablet PC. Inkjet printers and cartridges are relatively inexpensive, but they are slower than laser printers. Using an inkjet color printer, you can print pictures, banners, and greeting cards, as well as documents. Laser printers and cartridges are more expensive, but they print much faster than inkjet printers. Laser printers are better than inkjet printers when you are printing large documents. 14 www.gateway.com 2 Getting Started This chapter provides basic information about your Gateway convertible tablet PC. Read this chapter to find out how to:

Connect the AC adapter Start and turn off your convertible tablet PC Identify the status indicators Use the keyboard Use the EZ Pad touchpad Use the display Use the pen Connect the modem Connect to an Ethernet network Install peripheral devices 15 Chapter 2: Getting Started Safety instructions Certain precautions should be observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to your convertible tablet PC. General tips When setting up your convertible tablet PC for work, place it on a level surface. Before you clean your convertible tablet PC, turn if off, unplug it from its power source, and remove the battery. For more information, see Cleaning your convertible tablet PC on page 244. Do not push objects into air vents or openings of your convertible tablet PC. Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components. When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector, not on the cable itself. As you pull out the connector, keep it evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable make sure both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. Use of mobile phones can interfere with the sound system. Your convertible tablet PC operation is not impaired but we recommend that a distance of 12 inches (30 cm) be maintained between your convertible tablet PC and the mobile phone. When you move your convertible tablet PC between environments with very different humidity or temperature ranges, condensation may form on or within your convertible tablet PC. To avoid damaging your convertible tablet PC, allow sufficient time for the moisture to evaporate before using your convertible tablet PC. When traveling, do not check your convertible tablet PC as baggage. You can put your convertible tablet PC through an X-ray security machine, but never put your convertible tablet PC through a metal detector. If you have your convertible tablet PC checked by hand, be sure to have a charged battery available in case you are asked to turn on your convertible tablet PC. For more information, see Traveling With Your Gateway M275 on page 185. When traveling, do not place your convertible tablet PC in overhead storage compartments where it could slide around. For more information, see Traveling With Your Gateway M275 on page 185. 16 www.gateway.com Safety instructions Do not drop your convertible tablet PC or subject it to other physical shocks. To completely turn off all convertible tablet PC power, turn your convertible tablet PC off, remove the battery, and disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet. The bottom of your convertible tablet PC can become warm with use. Do not apply heavy pressure to your convertible tablet PC or subject it to strong impact. Excessive pressure or impact can cause damage to convertible tablet PC components or otherwise cause malfunctions. Some PC Cards can become hot with prolonged use. Overheating of a PC Card can result in errors or instability in the cards operation. Be careful when you remove a PC Card that has been used for extended periods. Using the battery Do not carry a battery in your pocket, purse, or other container where metal objects (such as car keys) could short-circuit the battery terminals. The resulting excessive current flow can cause extremely high temperatures and may result in heat damage. Protect your convertible tablet PC, battery, and hard drive from environmental hazards such as dirt, dust, food, liquids, temperature extremes, and overexposure to sunlight. Replace only with a Gateway convertible tablet PC battery to avoid risk of fire or explosion. For more information, see Changing batteries on page 171. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. For more information, see Changing batteries on page 171. Using the AC adapter Place the adapter in a ventilated area, such as a desktop or on the floor, when you use it to run your convertible tablet PC or to charge the battery. Do not cover the adapter with papers or other items that will reduce cooling, and do not use the adapter while it is inside a carrying case. Make sure that nothing rests on your adapter's power cable and that the cable is not located where it can be tripped over or stepped on. www.gateway.com 17 Chapter 2: Getting Started Use only the adapter and power cord approved for use with this convertible tablet PC. Use of another type of adapter may create a risk of fire or explosion. If you use an extension cable with your adapter, ensure that the total ampere rating of the products plugged in to the extension cable does not exceed the ampere rating of the extension cable. Basic safety precautions When using your convertible tablet PC and peripheral devices, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

Do not use this product near water. For example, do not use it near a bathtub or kitchen sink. Avoid using the wired modem or LAN during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. The cable used with the modem should be manufactured with a minimum wire size of 26 American wire gauge (AWG) and an FCC-compliant RJ-11 modular plug. To help avoid the potential hazard of electric shock, do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform maintenance or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Warning When working with peripheral devices or replacing memory modules, always follow installation instructions closely. Except for replacing memory or the hard drive, do not attempt to service your convertible tablet PC yourself.

(See Using eSupport on page 55 and Telephone support on page 310 for service information.) 18 www.gateway.com Connecting the AC adapter Connecting the AC adapter You can run your convertible tablet PC using an AC adapter or your convertible tablet PCs battery. The battery was shipped to you partially charged. You should use the AC adapter right away to fully charge the battery. Allow 24 hours for the battery to fully charge. Important If the battery is not fully charged before you use your convertible tablet PC on battery power for the first time, the battery life may be much shorter than you expect. If the battery life seems short even after being charged for 24 hours, the battery may need to be recalibrated. For more information, see Recalibrating the battery on page 170. To connect the AC adapter:

1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. Warning Make sure that you use the AC adapter that came with your convertible tablet PC or one of the same type purchased from Gateway. Replace the power cord if it becomes damaged. The replacement cord must be of the same type and voltage rating as the original cord or your convertible tablet PC may be damaged. www.gateway.com 19 Chapter 2: Getting Started 2 Connect the AC adapter to your convertible tablet PCs power connector. 3 Plug the power cord into a wall outlet. The battery charge indicator turns on (see LCD panel status indicators on page 25 for the location of the battery charge indicator). If the battery charge indicator does not turn on, unplug the adapter from your convertible tablet PC, then plug it back in. 4 When you finish using your convertible tablet PC for the first time, turn it off and leave it connected to AC power for at least 24 hours. 5 If the battery charge indicator does not show a full charge after 24 hours, contact Gateway Technical Support at support.gateway.com/support/ask_gateway.asp. Warning Do not attempt to disassemble the AC adapter. The AC adapter has no user-replaceable or user-serviceable parts inside. The AC adapter has dangerous voltages that can cause serious injury or death. Contact Gateway about returning defective AC adapters. 20 www.gateway.com Connecting the AC adapter Protecting from power source problems During a power surge, the voltage level of electricity coming into your convertible tablet PC can increase to far above normal levels and cause data loss or system damage. Protect your convertible tablet PC and peripheral devices by connecting them to a surge protector, which absorbs voltage surges and prevents them from reaching your convertible tablet PC. Warning High voltages can enter your convertible tablet PC through both the power cord and the modem connection. Protect your convertible tablet PC by using a surge protector. If you have a telephone modem, use a surge protector that has a modem jack. If you have a cable modem, use a surge protector that has an antenna/cable TV jack. During an electrical storm, unplug both the surge protector and the modem. www.gateway.com 21 Chapter 2: Getting Started Starting your convertible tablet PC To start your convertible tablet PC:

1 Press the latch on the front of your convertible tablet PC, then lift the LCD panel. 2 Slide the power switch located on the left side of your convertible tablet PC. The power switch is preset to On/Off mode. However, you can also set it to function in Standby/Resume mode. For instructions on changing the power switch mode, see Changing power settings on page 178. 3 If you are starting your convertible tablet PC for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your convertible tablet PC. 22 www.gateway.com Turning off your convertible tablet PC Waking up your convertible tablet PC When you do not use your convertible tablet PC for several minutes, or if you close the LCD panel without turning your convertible tablet PC off, it may enter a power-saving mode called Standby. While in Standby, the power indicator flashes. If your convertible tablet PC is in Standby mode, slide the power switch to wake it up. For more information on changing power-saving settings, see Changing power settings on page 178. Turning off your convertible tablet PC To turn off your convertible tablet PC:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Turn Off Computer. The Turn Off Computer dialog box opens. 2 Click/Tap Turn Off. Windows shuts down and turns off your convertible tablet PC. Important If for some reason you cannot use the Turn Off Computer option in Windows to turn off your convertible tablet PC, slide and hold the power switch for about five seconds, then release it. www.gateway.com 23 Chapter 2: Getting Started Restarting (rebooting) your convertible tablet PC If your convertible tablet PC does not respond to keyboard or touchpad input, you may have to close programs that are not responding. If closing unresponsive programs does not restore your convertible tablet PC to normal operation, you may have to restart (reboot) your convertible tablet PC. To close unresponsive programs and restart your convertible tablet PC:

1 Press the Windows Security button. A window opens that lets you close a program that is not responding. For more information, see LCD panel buttons on page 32.

-OR-

Press CTRL+ALT+DEL. A window opens that lets you close a program that is not responding. 2 Click/Tap the program that is not responding. 3 Click/Tap End Task. 4 If your convertible tablet PC does not respond, turn it off, wait ten seconds and turn it on again. Important If your convertible tablet PC does not turn off immediately, complete the following steps until your convertible tablet PC turns off:

1 Slide and hold the power switch for about five seconds, then release it. 2 Insert a straightened paper clip into the reset hole on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC. 3 Unplug the power cord and remove the battery for more than 10 seconds. As a part of the regular startup process, a program to check the disk status runs automatically. When the checks are finished, Windows starts. 24 www.gateway.com Status indicators Status indicators LCD panel status indicators LCD panel status indicators inform you when a drive is being used or indicate the power status of your convertible tablet PC. Memory card reader Disc drive Battery charge Hard drive Power Indicator Hard drive Icon Description The hard drive is in use. Disc drive The DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive is in use. Memory card reader The memory card reader is in use. www.gateway.com 25 Chapter 2: Getting Started Indicator Icon Description Battery charge Power The LED shows the battery activity and status. LED blue - battery is fully charged. LED purple - battery is charging. LED blinking red - battery charge is very low. LED solid red - battery is malfunctioning. This LED only lights up when your convertible tablet PC is connected to AC power or the battery charge is very low. The LED shows your convertible tablet PCs power status. LED on - convertible tablet PC is on. LED blinking - convertible tablet PC is in Standby mode. LED off - convertible tablet PC is off. 26 www.gateway.com Keyboard status indicators Keyboard status indicators inform you when a button has been pressed that affects how the keyboard is used. Status indicators Pad lock Scroll lock Caps lock Indicator Caps Lock Scroll Lock Icon Description Caps Lock is turned on. Scroll Lock is turned on. For more information, see System key combinations on page 30. Pad Lock Numeric keypad is turned on. 1 www.gateway.com 27 Chapter 2: Getting Started Using the keyboard Your convertible tablet PC features a full-size keyboard that functions the same as a desktop computer keyboard. Many of the keys have been assigned alternate functions, including shortcut keys for Windows and function keys for specific system operations. You can attach an external keyboard to your convertible tablet PC using a USB port. You do not need to shut down your convertible tablet PC to connect a USB keyboard. Function keys/

System keys Navigation keys/

Volume keys FN key Windows key Numeric keypad Application key Arrow keys/LCD brightness keys 28 www.gateway.com Using the keyboard Key types The keyboard has several different types of keys. Some keys perform specific actions when pressed alone and other actions when pressed in combination with another key. Key type Icon Description Function keys System keys Navigation keys Volume keys FN key Windows key Numeric keypad Application key Arrow keys LCD brightness keys Press these keys labeled F1 to F12 to perform actions in programs. For example, pressing F1 may open help. Each program uses different function keys for different purposes. See the program documentation to find out more about the function key actions. Press these colored keys in combination with the FN key to perform specific actions. For more information, see System key combinations on page 30. Press these keys to move the cursor to the beginning of a line, to the end of a line, up the page, down the page, to the beginning of a document, or to the end of a document. Press these colored keys in combination with the FN key to increase or decrease the volume or to turn off all sound. Press the FN key in combination with a colored system key (such as STATUS, STANDBY, or PAUSE) to perform a specific action. Press this key to open the Windows Start menu. This key can also be used in combination with other keys to open utilities like F (Search utility), R (Run utility), and E (Explorer utility). Use these keys to type numbers when the numeric keypad is turned on. Press this key for quick access to shortcut menus and help assistants in Windows. Press these keys to move the cursor up, down, right, or left. Press these colored keys in combination with the FN key to control the screen brightness. www.gateway.com 29 Chapter 2: Getting Started System key combinations When you press the FN key and a system key at the same time, your convertible tablet PC performs the action identified by the colored text or icon on the key. Press and hold FN, then press this system key... To... Display the power status box in the upper-left corner of your display. The box shows the battery charge level, the BIOS version, and whether the AC adapter is being used. Press the key combination again to close this box. Toggle your convertible tablet PCs display between the LCD, an external monitor, or both displays at the same time. A monitor must be plugged into the monitor port on your convertible tablet PC. Enter Standby mode. Slide the power switch to leave Standby mode. For more information, see Changing power modes on page 177. Turn on Pad Lock so you can use the numeric keypad. Press this key combination again to turn off Pad Lock. The Pad Lock status indicator appears when this function is turned on. Pause the text scrolling in a DOS screen. Press this key combination again to continue scrolling. The Scroll Lock status indicator appears when this function is turned on. (This function is only available in some programs.) Pause execution of a DOS program. (This function is only available in some programs.) Stop the currently running DOS program. (This function is only available in some programs.) Increase the brightness of the display. 30 www.gateway.com Press and hold FN, then press this system key... To... Decrease the brightness of the display. Using the keyboard Home PgUp PgDn Mute the sound. Press the key combination again to restore the sound. For more information, see Adjusting the volume on page 102. Increase the volume. For more information, see Adjusting the volume on page 102. Decrease the volume. For more information, see Adjusting the volume on page 102. www.gateway.com 31 Chapter 2: Getting Started Buttons LCD panel buttons Press the LCD panel buttons to control the convertible tablet PC while it is in tablet mode. Brightness boost Tablet input panel Screen rotation Windows security Button Screen rotation Tablet input panel Icon Press to... Rotate the display orientation. For more information, see Changing display orientation on page 192. Open the tablet input panel. For more information, see Tablet Input Panel (TIP) on page 44. 32 www.gateway.com Buttons Button Brightness boost Windows security Icon Press to... Boost the brightness... For more information, see Adjusting brightness on page 192. Open the Windows Task Manager. Also is used for domain authentication or logon screen. Multi-function buttons Press the multi-function buttons to open the programs associated with them. Help Internet E-mail My Computer Button E-mail Icon Press to... Open your default e-mail program. www.gateway.com 33 Chapter 2: Getting Started Button Internet Help Icon Press to... Open your default Web browser. Open online help. My Computer Open the My Computer window. 34 www.gateway.com Using the EZ Pad touchpad The EZ Pad consists of a touchpad, two buttons, and a rocker switch. Using the EZ Pad touchpad Left touchpad button Right touchpad button Rocker switch Touchpad When you move your finger on the touchpad, the pointer (arrow) on the screen moves in the same direction. www.gateway.com 35 Chapter 2: Getting Started You can use the EZ-Pad left and right buttons below the touchpad to select objects. You can assign a function to the rocker switch between the touchpad buttons. This function can be to scroll up or down, maximize or minimize the active window, or open and close the Start menu. For more information about programming the rocker switch, see Changing the touchpad settings on page 203. Using the touchpad To... Do this... Move the pointer on the screen. Select an object on the screen. Start a program or open a file or folder. Move your finger around on the touchpad. If you run out of space and need to move the pointer farther, lift your finger, move it to the middle of the touchpad, then continue moving your finger. Position the pointer over the object. Quickly press and release the left button once. This action is called clicking. Position the pointer over the object. Press the left button twice in rapid succession. This action is called double-clicking. 36 www.gateway.com To... Do this... Access a shortcut menu or find more information about an object on the screen. Move an object on the screen. Using the EZ Pad touchpad Position the pointer over the object. Quickly press and release the right button once. This action is called right-clicking. Position the pointer over the object. Press the left button and hold it down, then use the touchpad to move (drag) the object to the appropriate part of the screen. Release the button to drop the object where you want it. For instructions on how to adjust the double-click speed, pointer speed, right-hand or left-hand configuration, and other touchpad settings, see Changing the touchpad settings on page 203. www.gateway.com 37 Chapter 2: Getting Started Using the display Your convertible tablet PCs screen combines the eye-soothing readability of a liquid-crystal display with the responsiveness of a pen controller. The screen provides a hard writing surface, minimizes glare, and increases readability. Unlike other touchscreens and PDAs, your convertible tablet PCs display responds only to your convertible tablet PCs pen. Your convertible tablet PC will not respond to a PDA pen or the touch of a fingertip. Steady your hand on the display surface while writing. The pressure of your hand will not affect any open programs. Switching from AC to battery power dims the display slightly to save power. 38 www.gateway.com Using the display Converting the display from notebook to tablet mode To convert the display from notebook mode to tablet mode:

1 Open the LCD panel to the normal viewing position. 2 Locate the rotation direction arrow on the LCD panel hinge. Rotation direction arrow 3 Rotate the LCD panel in the direction of the rotation direction arrow until the panel is backwards. www.gateway.com 39 Chapter 2: Getting Started 4 Close the LCD panel onto the keyboard. There is a click when the LCD panel latch locks. 40 www.gateway.com Using the pen Using the pen Your convertible tablet PCs pen is the only device that can write, tap, and input directly on your convertible tablet PCs display. Warning A finger-tap or PDA stylus has no effect on your convertible tablet PCs display, and ink pens and other pointed objects could damage the surface. Always use the pen that came with your convertible tablet PC. You can order extra pens from Gateway. The pen can do everything a mouse does. Just think tap instead of click. With a mouse:

With a pen:

Point and click Point and tap Double-click Double-tap Click-and-drag Tap-and-drag Right-click Button-tap

(press the pen button while tapping or press and hold with the pen) Storing and removing the pen To store the pen in your convertible tablet PC:

1 Locate the pen holder on the right side of your convertible tablet PC. For more information, see Right Side on page 5. 2 Slide the pen into the holder with the pocket clip down until the pen clicks into place. www.gateway.com 41 Chapter 2: Getting Started To remove the pen from our convertible tablet PC:

1 Locate the pen latch on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC. For more information, see Bottom on page 7. 2 Slide the pen latch until the pen is release from the pen holder. Calibration The first time you use your convertible tablet PC, you should calibrate your pen for both portrait and landscape orientations. Calibration ensures the accuracy of the pen and adjusts the screens performance for different users. If the on-screen pointer does not seem to line up with the tip of the penfor example, because someone else has used your convertible tablet PC and adjusted it for their own userecalibrate it to your tapping patterns. Recalibrate if you write with the opposite hand from the previous userright-handed writer to left-handed writer. 42 www.gateway.com To open the calibration program:

Double-click/Double-tap

(Tablet and Pen Settings) in the taskbar, then click/tap Calibrate. Using the pen Gestures A gesture is a shape you draw with your convertible tablet PC pen to send a command to your convertible tablet PC. In Input Panel, you can also use gestures to control the insertion point in the active program. When you use these gestures, you get the same result as pressing the corresponding key on a standard keyboard. Open the Tablet Input Panel by waving the pen back and forth over the screen. Backspace by drawing a right-to-left line on the display surface. In most text input programs, you can erase text by scratching it out. Windows interprets a scratchout as a delete command. To erase, draw a short, wide Z. You will find more information about gestures and gesture symbols, as well as handwriting tips, in the Help section of the TIPs Tools menu. For more information, see Tablet Input Panel (TIP) on page 44. www.gateway.com 43 Chapter 2: Getting Started Pen button The pen button serves the same function as the right button on a mouse. Press it and tap (button-tap) to open right-click menus when they are available. Tips Hold the pen the same way you hold a writing pen, and steady your writing hand by resting it on the display surface. Line up the pointer before you tap, in cases where the pointer and pen point are out of alignment. The screen reads the position of the pointer, not the tap. Store the pen in the Gateway convertible tablet PCs pen holder. Store extra pens in a drawer to avoid prolonged pressure on the pen tip. The pen has internal electronics, so keep it dry and avoid contact with liquids. Your convertible tablet PC responds to most Penabled EMR pens manufactured by Wacom. Tablet Input Panel (TIP)

(the Keyboard icon) near the Start button to open the Tablet Input Panel Tap

(TIP). Use the TIP to enter data by hand, soft keyboard, or voice into a word processing program or a text-entry form. Access the TIP keyboard and writing pad by clicking/tapping the tabs near the bottom of the window. To set up speech options, click/tap Tools, then click/tap Speech. 44 www.gateway.com Using the pen TIP tips Open a program for your input (for example, a word processing program or a Web form) before using the writing pad or soft keyboard. To adjust writing pad and keyboard settings, click/tap Tools, then click/tap Options. For security and accuracy when entering masked text (such as passwords), use your convertible tablet PC Input Panels soft keyboard instead of the writing pad. www.gateway.com 45 Chapter 2: Getting Started Using speech recognition The Gateway convertible tablet PC is designed to accept and interpret the human voice, both for dictation (speech recognition) and for keyboard-equivalent voice commands. Set up speech recognition through your convertible tablet PC Input Panels Tools menu. Learn more about voice commands in the Accessibility section of the Help and Support Center. Use the built-in microphone or an external microphone. To modify the speech recognition function, see Adjusting the Tablet PC Input Panel Settings on page 202. 46 www.gateway.com Connecting the modem Connecting the modem Your convertible tablet PC has a built-in 56K modem that you can use to connect to a standard telephone line. Important To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications line cord. To connect the modem:

1 Insert one end of the modem cable into the modem jack side of your convertible tablet PC. on the right 2 Insert the other end of the modem cable into a telephone wall jack. The modem will not work with digital or PBX telephone lines. 3 Start your convertible tablet PC, then start your communications program. www.gateway.com 47 Chapter 2: Getting Started Connecting to a wired Ethernet network Your convertible tablet PC has a network jack that you can use to connect to a 10/100 wired Ethernet network. Important Your convertible tablet PC may be equipped with a built-in wireless Ethernet emitter or you may have a wireless Ethernet PC Card. For information about connecting to a wired or wireless Ethernet network, see Networking Your Gateway M275 on page 207. For information about installing a wireless Ethernet PC Card, see Adding and removing a PC Card on page 258. To connect to a wired Ethernet network:

1 Insert one end of the network cable into the network jack of your convertible tablet PC. on the back 2 Insert the other end of the network cable into a network jack. Ask your network administrator to help you select the correct network jack. 48 www.gateway.com Installing a printer, scanner, or other peripheral device Broadband Internet connections You can use your convertible tablet PCs Ethernet jack for more than just networking. Many broadband Internet connections, such as cable modems and DSL modems, connect to your convertible tablet PCs Ethernet jack. For more information, see Using the Internet on page 79 and Networking Your Gateway M275 on page 207. Installing a printer, scanner, or other peripheral device Important Before you install a printer, scanner, or other peripheral device, see the device documentation and installation instructions. Your convertible tablet PC or port replicator has one or more of the following ports: IEEE 1394 (also known as Firewire or i.Link), Universal Serial Bus (USB), serial, and parallel. You use these ports to connect peripheral devices such as printers, scanners, and digital cameras to your convertible tablet PC. For more information about port locations, see Checking Out Your Gateway M275 on page 1 and Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator on page 277. IEEE 1394 and USB ports support plug-and-play and hot-swapping, which means that your convertible tablet PC will usually recognize such a device whenever you plug it into the appropriate port. When you use an IEEE 1394 or USB device for the first time, your convertible tablet PC will prompt you to install any software the device needs. After doing this, you can disconnect and reconnect the device at any time. Parallel and serial port devices are not plug-and-play. See the device documentation for detailed information and installation instructions. Help and Support For more information about installing peripheral devices, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword installing devices in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 49 Chapter 2: Getting Started 50 www.gateway.com 3 Getting Help This chapter tells you about additional information resources available to help you use your convertible tablet PC. Read this chapter to learn how to access:

Help and Support Do More With Gateway Online help Gateway Web site 51 Chapter 3: Getting Help Help and Support Your convertible tablet PC includes Help and Support, an easily accessible collection of help information, troubleshooters, instructional videos, and automated support. Use Help and Support to answer questions about Windows. To start Help and Support:

Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Help and Support opens. You can find help information by clicking/tapping a link, performing a search, or browsing the index. Searching for a topic To search for a topic in Help and Support, type a word or phrase (keyword) in the Search box located at the top of any Help and Support screen, then click/tap the arrow button. For each search, you receive the following search result types:

Suggested Topics - These topics are located in Help and Support and are relevant to your search topic. Full-text Search Matches - These topics are located in Help and Support and contain the words you entered in the Search box. Microsoft Knowledge Base - These topics are located on the Microsoft Web site and contain the words you entered in the Search box. You must be connected to the Internet to search for and access these topics. To view a list of your search results, click/tap the results header for the type of results you want to view. To view a topic, click/tap the topic name in the Search Results list. 52 www.gateway.com Do More With Gateway Do More With Gateway Your convertible tablet PC may include Do More With Gateway, a tool that provides additional information about using your Gateway convertible tablet PC for digital music, digital photography, digital video, gaming, and other programs. To access Do More With Gateway, click/tap Start, then click/tap Do More With Gateway. Click/Tap the topics listed on the left-side of the page to learn more about the software already installed on your convertible tablet PC as well as partnerships and special offers available through Gateway. www.gateway.com 53 Chapter 3: Getting Help Online help Many programs provide information online so you can research a topic or learn how to perform a task while you are using the program. You can access most online help information by selecting a topic from a Help menu or by clicking/tapping a Help button. You can search for information by viewing the help contents, checking the index, searching for a topic or keyword, or browsing through the online help. 54 www.gateway.com Gateway Web site Gateway Web site Gateways online support is available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week and provides the most current drivers, product specifications, tutorials, and personalized information about your convertible tablet PC. Visit the Gateway eSupport Web site at support.gateway.com. For more information about connecting to the Internet, see Using the Internet on page 79. Using eSupport The eSupport site is divided into five major areas:

Support Home Downloads Contact Us Account Info PC Tools Each of these areas is represented by a menu across the top of the Web page. www.gateway.com 55 Chapter 3: Getting Help Support Home To get specific information about your convertible tablet PC, type your serial number into the My Support box, then click/tap Continue, or click/tap Look up my serial number for me. For more information, see Finding your specifications on page 12. Click/Tap Support Home, then click/tap All Support Documents to access product documentation, specifications, and guides. By entering your serial number, you get specific documents related to your convertible tablet PC. You can also browse through the reference area to locate an article specific to the question you have. Click/Tap Support Home, then click/tap General Tutorials to access an extensive library of how-to articles and videos on topics such as making audio CDs and installing a hard drive. Downloads Click/Tap Downloads, then click/tap My Downloads to get the latest software updates for BIOS and driver upgrades. By entering your serial number you get drivers specific to your convertible tablet PC. Click/Tap All Downloads to walk through a step-by-step wizard to locate your drivers. Contact Us Click/Tap Contact Us to access links to technical support with a live technician, including chat and e-mail. Click/Tap Call Us to get a list of Gateway telephone numbers for both sales and support. For more information, see Telephone numbers on page 311. Account Info Click/Tap Account Info to access support for non-technical issues, like the status of your order or changing your account address. PC Tools Click/Tap PC Tools to access utilities to help you manage your convertible tablet PC. 56 www.gateway.com 4 Windows Basics Read this chapter to learn how to:

Use the Windows desktop Manage files and folders Work with documents Use shortcuts 57 Chapter 4: Windows Basics About Windows XP tablet PC Edition The Microsoft Windows XP tablet PC Edition operating system is a fully functioning version of Windows XP Professional with added pen-based computing features:

Tablet and Pen Settings set properties for the pen, tablet buttons, and display screen tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) use its writing pad, soft keyboard, and voice recognition for entering data Windows Journal hand-write documents, then turn them into text or image files Sticky Notes make a quick note with your pen or voice and drop it into another program Document annotation insert handwritten notes into Word documents and other programs Enhanced speech and voice recognition say what you are thinking, and your tablet will understand Inkball practice and master pen input with this game of strategy The Whats New in Windows XP link in the Help and Support Center and the Windows XP Start Here booklet that shipped with your convertible tablet PC can help you learn more about using Windows XP tablet PC Edition. 58 www.gateway.com About the Windows environment About the Windows environment After your convertible tablet PC starts, the first screen you see is the Windows desktop. The desktop is like the top of a real desk. Think of the desktop as your personalized work space where you open programs and perform other tasks. Your desktop may be different from this example, depending on how your convertible tablet PC is set up. Help and Support For more information about the Windows XP desktop, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword Windows desktop in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 59 Chapter 4: Windows Basics Using the desktop The desktop contains the taskbar, the Start button, and the Recycle Bin icon. Desktop elements Description The taskbar is the bar at the bottom of the computer display containing the Start button on the left and a clock on the right. Other buttons on the taskbar represent programs that are running. Click/Tap a programs button on the taskbar to open the programs window. The Start button provides access to programs, files, help for Windows and other programs, and computer tools and utilities. Click/Tap the Start button, then open a file or program by clicking/tapping an item on the menu that opens. The Recycle Bin is where files, folders, and programs that you discarded are stored. You must empty the Recycle Bin to permanently delete them from your convertible tablet PC. For instructions on how to use the Recycle Bin, see Deleting files and folders on page 68. Using the Start menu You can start programs, open files, customize your system, get help, search for files and folders, and more using the Start menu. To use the Start menu:

1 Click/Tap the Start button on the lower left of the Windows desktop. The Start menu opens showing you the first level of menu items. 2 Click/Tap All Programs to see all programs and files in the Start menu. When you move the mouse pointer over any menu item that has an arrow next to it, another menu, called a submenu, opens and reveals related files, programs, or commands. 60 www.gateway.com 3 Click/Tap a file or program to open it. Using the desktop Help and Support For more information about the Windows XP Start menu, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword Windows Start menu in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Adding icons to the desktop You may want to add an icon (shortcut) to the desktop for a program that you use frequently. To add icons to the desktop:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap All Programs. www.gateway.com 61 Chapter 4: Windows Basics 2 Right-click (press the right touchpad button) the program that you want to add to the desktop.

-OR-

Button-tap (press the pen button) the program that you want to add to the desktop. 3 Click/Tap Send To, then click/tap Desktop (create shortcut). A shortcut icon for that program appears on the desktop. Help and Support For more information about desktop icons, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword desktop icons in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Identifying window items When you double-click/double-tap the icon for a drive, folder, file, or program, a window opens on the desktop. This example shows the Local Disk (C:) window, which opens after you double-click/double-tap the Local Disk (C:) icon in the My Computer window. Title bar Menu bar Close Maximize Minimize 62 www.gateway.com Every program window looks a little different because each has its own menus, icons, and controls. Most windows include these items:

Window item Description Identifying window items The title bar is the horizontal bar at the top of a window that shows the window title. Clicking/Tapping the minimize button reduces the active window to a button on the taskbar. Clicking/Tapping the program button in the taskbar opens the window again. Clicking/Tapping the maximize button expands the active window to fit the entire computer display. Clicking/Tapping the maximize button again restores the window to its former size. Clicking/Tapping the close button closes the active window or program. Clicking/Tapping an item on the menu bar starts an action such as Print or Save. Help and Support For more information about windows, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword window in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 63 Chapter 4: Windows Basics Working with files and folders You can organize your files and programs to suit your preferences much like you would store information in a file cabinet. You can store these files in folders and copy, move, and delete the information just as you would reorganize and throw away information in a file cabinet. Viewing drives Drives are like file cabinets because they hold files and folders. A convertible tablet PC almost always has more than one drive. Each drive has a letter, usually Local Disk (C:) for the hard drive and 3 Floppy (A:) for the optional diskette drive. You will also have more drives such as a DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. To view the drives on your convertible tablet PC:

Click/Tap Start, then click/tap My Computer on the Start menu. Drives 64 www.gateway.com Working with files and folders To see the files and folders on a drive:

Double-click/Double-tap the drive icon. If you do not see the contents of a drive after you double-click/double-tap its icon, click/tap Show the contents of this drive. Help and Support For more information about files and folders, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword files and folders in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Creating folders Folders are much like the folders in a file cabinet. They can contain files and other folders. Files are much like paper documentsletters, spreadsheets, and picturesthat you keep on your convertible tablet PC. In fact, all information on a convertible tablet PC is stored in files. Folders Files www.gateway.com 65 Chapter 4: Windows Basics To create a folder:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap My Computer on the Start menu. 2 Double-click/Double-tap the drive where you want to put the new folder. Typically, Local Disk (C:) is your hard drive and 3 Floppy (A:) is your optional diskette drive. If you do not see the contents of the drive, click/tap Show the contents of this drive. 3 If you want to create a new folder inside an existing folder, double-click/double-tap the existing folder. If you do not see the contents of the folder, click/tap Show the contents of this drive or Show the contents of this folder. 4 Click/Tap File, New, then click/tap Folder. The new folder is created. 5 Type a name for the folder, then press ENTER. The new folder name appears by the folder icon. Help and Support For more information about creating files and folders, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword creating files and folders in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. For information about renaming folders, see Keyboard shortcuts on page 78. Copying and moving files and folders The skills you need to copy and move files are called copying, cutting, and pasting. When you copy and paste a file or folder, you place a copy of the file or folder on the Windows clipboard, which temporarily stores it. Then, when you decide what folder you want the copy to go in (the destination folder), you paste it there. When you cut and paste a file or folder, you remove the file or folder from its original location and place the file or folder on the Windows clipboard. When you decide where you want the file or folder to go, you paste it there. 66 www.gateway.com Working with files and folders Important The clipboard stores whatever you cut or copy until you cut or copy again. Then the clipboard contains the new information only. Therefore, you can paste copies of a file or folder into more than one place, but as soon as you copy or cut a different file or folder, the original file or folder is deleted from the clipboard. To copy a file or folder to another folder:

1 Locate the file or folder you want to copy. For more information, see Viewing drives on page 64 and Searching for files on page 71. 2 Right-click (press the right touchpad button) the file or folder that you want to copy. A pop-up menu opens on the desktop.

-OR-

Button-tap (press the pen button) the file or folder that you want to copy. A pop-up menu opens on the desktop. 3 Click/Tap Copy on the pop-up menu. 4 Open the destination folder. 5 With the pointer inside the destination folder, right-click/button-tap. 6 Click/Tap Paste. A copy of the file or folder appears in the new location. To move a file or folder to another folder:

1 Locate the file or folder you want to move. For more information, see Viewing drives on page 64 and Searching for files on page 71. 2 Right-click (press the right touchpad button) the file or folder that you want to move. A pop-up menu opens on the desktop.

-OR-

Button-tap (press the pen button) the file or folder that you want to move. A pop-up menu opens on the desktop. 3 Click/Tap Cut on the pop-up menu. 4 Open the destination folder. www.gateway.com 67 Chapter 4: Windows Basics 5 With the pointer inside the destination folder, right-click/button-tap. 6 Click/Tap Paste. The file or folder you moved appears in its new location and is removed from its old location. Help and Support For more information about copying files and folders or moving files and folders, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword copying files and folders or moving files and folders in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Deleting files and folders When you throw away paper files and folders, you take them from the file cabinet and put them in a trash can. Eventually the trash can is emptied. In Windows, you throw away files and folders by first moving them to the Windows trash can, called the Recycle Bin, where they remain until you decide to empty the bin. You can recover any file in the Recycle Bin as long as the bin has not been emptied. To delete files or folders:

1 In My Computer or Windows Explorer, click/tap the files or folders that you want to delete. For instructions on how to select multiple files and folders, see Keyboard shortcuts on page 78. If you cannot find the file you want to delete, see Searching for files on page 71. 2 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Delete. Windows moves the files and folders to the Recycle Bin. 68 www.gateway.com Working with files and folders Help and Support For more information about deleting files and folders, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword deleting files and folders in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. To recover files or folders from the Recycle Bin:

1 Double-click/Double-tap the Recycle Bin icon. The Recycle Bin window opens and lists the files and folders you have thrown away since you last emptied it. 2 Click/Tap the files or folders that you want to restore. For instructions on how to select multiple files and folders, see Keyboard shortcuts on page 78. 3 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Restore. Windows returns the deleted files or folders to their original locations. To empty the Recycle Bin:

Caution Emptying the Recycle Bin permanently erases any files or folders in the bin. These files cannot be restored. 1 Double-click/Double-tap the Recycle Bin icon on the desktop. The Recycle Bin window opens. 2 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Empty Recycle Bin. Windows asks you if you are sure that you want to empty the bin. 3 Click/Tap Yes. Windows permanently deletes all files in the Recycle Bin. Help and Support For more information about emptying the Recycle Bin, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword emptying Recycle Bin in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 69 Chapter 4: Windows Basics Browsing for files and folders A file or folder that you need is rarely right on top of your Windows desktop. It is usually on a drive inside a folder that may be inside yet another folder, and so on. Windows drives, folders, and files are organized in the same way as a real file cabinet in that they may have many levels (usually many more levels than a file cabinet, in fact). So you usually will have to search through levels of folders to find the file or folder that you need. This is called browsing. To browse for a file:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap My Computer. The My Computer window opens. 2 Double-click/Double-tap the drive or folder that you think contains the file or folder that you want to find. If you do not see the contents of a folder, click/tap Show the contents of this drive or Show the contents of this folder. 70 www.gateway.com

3 Continue double-clicking/double-tapping folders and their subfolders until you find the file or folder you want. Searching for files Help and Support For more information about browsing for files and folders, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword files and folders in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Searching for files If you are looking for a particular file or folder or a set of files or folders that have characteristics in common, but you do not remember where they are stored on your hard drive, you can use the Search utility to search by:

Name or part of a name Creation date Modification date File type Text contained in the file Time period in which it was created or modified You can also combine search criteria to refine searches. Files and folders found using this utility can be opened, copied, cut, renamed, or deleted directly from the list in the results window. www.gateway.com 71 Chapter 4: Windows Basics Using the Windows Search utility To find files and folders using the Search utility:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Search. The Search Results window opens. Click/Tap All files and folders. 2 If you want to search by file or folder name, type in all or part of the file or folder name in the name box in the left pane of the window. If you type all of the name, Search will list all files and folders of that name. If you type part of the name, Search will list all of the file and folder names containing the letters you typed. 72 www.gateway.com 3 Click/Tap Search. When the search is completed, Windows lists the files and folders whose names contain the text that you searched for. Searching for files 4 Open a file, folder, or program by double-clicking/double-tapping the name in the list. Help and Support For more information about searching for files and folders, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword searching in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Using advanced search options Search can find files meeting more criteria than file name. You can narrow your search by selecting the search options that you want. You can search by the:

Date the file was created or modified. Size of the file. Type of file, such as a program or a text document. www.gateway.com 73 Chapter 4: Windows Basics Working with documents Computer documents include word processing files, spreadsheet files, or other similar files. The basic methods of creating, saving, opening, and printing a document apply to most of these types of files. The following examples show how to create, save, open, and print a document using Microsoft WordPad. Similar procedures apply to other programs such as WordPerfect, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel. For more information about using a program, click/tap Help on its menu bar. Creating a new document To create a new document:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, then click/tap WordPad. Microsoft WordPad starts and a blank document opens. 2 Begin composing your document. Use the menus and toolbar buttons at the top of the window to format the document. 74 www.gateway.com Working with documents Saving a document After you create a document, you need to save it if you want to use it later. To save a document:

1 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Save. The Save As dialog box opens. Save in list File name 2 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Save in list, then click/tap the folder where you want to save the file. If you do not see the folder you want, browse through the folders listed below the Save in list. 3 Type a new file name in the File name box. 4 Click/Tap Save. Help and Support For more information about saving documents, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword saving in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 75 Chapter 4: Windows Basics Opening a document To view, revise, or print an existing document, first you need to open it. Open the document in the program that it was created in. To open a document:

1 Start the program. 2 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Open. 3 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Look in list, then click/tap the folder you want to open. If you do not see the folder you want, browse through the folders listed below the Look in list. Look in list 4 Double-click/Double-tap the document file name. The document opens. Help and Support For more information about opening documents, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword opening files in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 76 www.gateway.com Working with documents Printing a document To print a document, you must have a printer connected to your convertible tablet PC or have access to a network printer. For more information about installing or using your printer, see the printer documentation. To print a document:

1 Make sure that the printer is turned on and loaded with paper. 2 Start the program and open the document. 3 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Print. The Print dialog box opens. 4 Set the print options, then click/tap OK. The document prints. Help and Support For more information about printing documents, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword printing in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 77 Chapter 4: Windows Basics Keyboard shortcuts The following table shows a few shortcuts that you can use in Windows and almost all programs that run in Windows. For more information about shortcuts, see your Windows or program documentation. To... Do this... Copy a file, folder, text, or graphic Click the item, then press CTRL + C. Cut a file, folder, text, or graphic Click the item, then press CTRL + X. Paste a file, folder, text, or graphic Click inside the folder or window where you want to paste the object, then press CTRL + V. Select multiple items in a list or window Click the first item, press and hold down the CTRL key, then click each of the remaining items. Select multiple adjacent items in a list or window Click the first item in the list, press and hold down the SHIFT key, then click the last item in the list. Permanently delete a file or folder Rename a file or folder Click the file or folder, then press SHIFT + DELETE. The file or folder is permanently deleted. The file or folder is not stored in the Recycle Bin. Click the file or folder, press F2, type the new name, then press ENTER. Close the active window or program Press ALT + F4. Switch to a different file, folder, or running program Press ALT + TAB. Help and Support For more information about Windows keyboard shortcuts, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword Windows keyboard shortcuts in the Search box arrow.

, then click/tap the 78 www.gateway.com Using the Internet 5 This chapter provides information about the Internet and the World Wide Web. Read this chapter to learn how to:

Set up and access an Internet account using America Online Connect to a Web site using a browser Download files from the Internet Send and receive e-mail using America Online 79 Chapter 5: Using the Internet Learning about the Internet The Internet is a worldwide network of computers linked together to provide information to people everywhere. The two most popular services on the Internet are e-mail and the World Wide Web. You can access this network by connecting your convertible tablet PC to a telephone, DSL (Digital Subscriber Line), or cable line and signing up with an Internet service provider (ISP). Cable and DSL modems, a connection known as broadband, use your TV cable or special telephone lines to connect to your ISP and access the Internet. Cable and DSL modems connect to your convertible tablet PC through an Ethernet jack and provide a faster connection speed than a standard telephone modem. Important For the location of your modem and Ethernet jacks, see Right Side on page 5, Back on page 6, and Back on page 280. Internet Servers store information so other computers can access it from the Internet. Your computer connects to the Internet through an ISP. ISP Servers let you connect to the Internet and access your e-mail messages. 80 www.gateway.com Setting up an Internet account If you want to access the Internet you need:

A modem a device that connects your convertible tablet PC to other computers or servers using a telephone, DSL, or cable line. An Internet service provider a company that provides access to the Internet through an ISP server. When you connect to an ISP, the ISP server lets you access the Internet and your e-mail messages. A Web browser a program that displays information from the World Wide Web. An e-mail program a program that lets you create, send, and receive e-mail messages over the Internet. Setting up an Internet account Before you can view the information on the World Wide Web, you need to set up an Internet account with an Internet service provider (ISP). If you have chosen America Online as an ISP, follow these instructions to set up and connect to your account. To set up a different ISP service or to transfer an existing account to this convertible tablet PC, contact the ISP directly. If you set up an account with America Online, an Internet e-mail address is created for you. After completing the setup, you are ready to access the Internet. To set up an Internet account with America Online:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, then click/tap America Online. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions. After setting up your account, you can connect to the Internet and access your e-mail services. www.gateway.com 81 Chapter 5: Using the Internet Accessing your Internet account To connect to your America Online Internet account:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, then click/tap America Online. 2 Complete the member name and password information, then click/tap Connect. Your convertible tablet PC dials the Internet account telephone number. After connecting, the Welcome window opens. If you are using a service other than America Online, check with your ISP for the correct procedure for connecting. To disconnect from your America Online Internet account:

Click/Tap X in the top-right corner of the America Online window. Your convertible tablet PC disconnects from the Internet. Important Make sure that your convertible tablet PC disconnects correctly from your Internet account. If you do not have an unlimited hours ISP account, you may have to pay for the time that you are connected, even if you are not at your convertible tablet PC. If you are using a service other than America Online, check with your ISP for the correct procedure for disconnecting. Help and Support For general information about using Internet accounts, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword ISP in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 82 www.gateway.com Using the World Wide Web Using the World Wide Web The World Wide Web is a multimedia window to the Internet that gives you access to millions of information sources. Information on the Web comes to you on Web pages, which are electronic documents that you view using a Web page display program called a browser. You can use any of the commercially available Web browsers, like Microsoft Internet Explorer (which comes installed on your new convertible tablet PC), Netscape Navigator, or the browser built into America Online. Web pages can contain text, animations, music, and other multimedia features. A group of related Web pages is called a Web site. You can access Web sites to shop, track investments, read the news, download programs, and much more. You can explore a Web site or visit other Web sites by clicking/tapping areas on a Web page called links or hyperlinks. A link may be colored or underlined text, a picture, or an animated image. You can identify a link by moving the mouse pointer over it. If the pointer changes to a hand, the item is a link. To learn more about using the Web browser, click/tap Help in the menu bar. Link Web page Linked Web page www.gateway.com 83 Chapter 5: Using the Internet Connecting to a Web site After you set up an account with an Internet service provider (ISP) such as America Online, you can access the many information sources on the World Wide Web. To connect to a Web site:

1 Connect to your Internet account. After your convertible tablet PC connects, a default opening page or welcome screen opens. 2 To go to a different Web site, type the address (called a URL for Universal Resource Locator) in the browser address bar (for example www.gateway.com), then click/tap GO on the browser address bar.

- OR -

On the current Web page, click/tap a link to a Web site. The Web browser locates the server computer on the Internet, downloads

(transfers) data to your convertible tablet PC, and displays the page on the site that you requested. Help and Support For more information about connecting to a Web site, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword connecting to Web site in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Sometimes Web pages display slowly. The speed that a Web page displays on your screen depends on the complexity of the Web page and other Internet conditions. Additionally, the speed of your connection will determine how fast Web pages display. 84 www.gateway.com Downloading files Using the World Wide Web Downloading is the process of transferring files from a computer on the Internet to your convertible tablet PC. To protect your convertible tablet PC against viruses, make sure that you scan the files you download. For more information, see Protecting your convertible tablet PC from viruses on page 233. To download files or programs from a Web site:

1 Connect to your Internet account. 2 In the address bar, type the address of the Web site that contains the file or program you want to download, then click/tap GO on the browser address bar.

- OR -

Click/Tap a link on a Web page to navigate to the Web site containing the file that you want to download. 3 Create or locate the folder where you want to store the file on your convertible tablet PC. For more information, see Working with documents on page 74. 4 Click/Tap the link on the Web page for the file that you want to download. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions for saving the file in the folder that you want. A copy of the file is downloaded to your convertible tablet PC. The time that it takes to transfer the file to your convertible tablet PC depends on file size and Internet conditions. 6 Open the folder that you created. 7 Install or view the downloaded file by double-clicking/double-tapping it. If applicable, follow the instructions provided on the Web site to run or install the program. Help and Support For more information about downloading files, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword downloading files in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 85 Chapter 5: Using the Internet Using e-mail E-mail (electronic mail) lets you send messages to anyone who has an Internet connection and e-mail address. E-mail is usually a free service of your Internet account. The Internet never closes, so you can send e-mail messages at any time. Your e-mail messages arrive at most e-mail addresses in minutes. An e-mail address consists of a user name, the @ symbol, and the Internet domain name of the Internet service provider (ISP) or company that hosts that user. Your e-mail address is assigned when you sign up for an account with an ISP. For example, a person with an account with America Online might have an e-mail address that is similar to this one:

jdoe@aol.com User name Internet domain name Sending e-mail To send e-mail using America Online:

1 Connect to your America Online account. 2 Click/Tap Write. 3 Type the e-mail address of the recipient you want to send e-mail to in the Send To box. 4 Type the subject of your e-mail in the Subject box. 5 Type the e-mail message. 6 When finished, click/tap Send Now. Your e-mail is sent over the Internet to the e-mail address you specified. 86 www.gateway.com Using e-mail Checking your e-mail To check your e-mail using America Online:

1 Connect to your America Online account. 2 Click/Tap Read. 3 Double-click/Double-tap the message you want to read. For more information about managing and organizing your e-mail messages, see the online help in your e-mail program. Help and Support For general information about using e-mail, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword e-mail in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 87 Chapter 5: Using the Internet 88 www.gateway.com 6 Sending and Receiving Faxes Microsoft Fax lets you send and receive faxes using the modem. Read this chapter to learn how to:

Install and configure Fax Create and send a new fax Set up a fax cover page template Fax a document you scanned or created in another program Receive, view, and print a fax Help and Support For more information about sending and receiving faxes, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword Fax in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 89 Chapter 6: Sending and Receiving Faxes Installing and configuring Fax Important Your modem cable must be installed before you can send and receive faxes. You cannot use your standard telephone modem to connect to the Internet while sending and receiving faxes. Installing Fax Microsoft Fax lets you send and receive faxes using your modem. When Windows XP was originally installed on your convertible tablet PC, Fax was not installed. You need to install Fax from your blue Operating System CD. To install Fax:

1 Insert the blue Operating System CD in your DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. 2 If the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP dialog box opens, click/tap Install optional Windows components. The Windows Components Wizard opens.

-OR-

If the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP dialog box does not open, click/tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap Add and Remove Programs. The Add or Remove Programs dialog box opens. Click/Tap Add/Remove Windows Components. The Windows Components Wizard opens. 3 Click/Tap Fax Services, then click/tap Next. 4 Click/Tap Finish to exit the Windows Components Wizard. 5 Click/Tap Exit to close the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP dialog box.

-OR-

Click/Tap Close to close the Add or Remove Programs dialog box. 90 www.gateway.com Installing and configuring Fax Configuring Fax Before you send your first fax, you need to set up your user information. Your fax cover sheets and fax headers contain this information, some of which is required by law. The Fax Configuration Wizard opens the first time you try to send a fax. Important The first time you run the Fax Configuration Wizard, you may need to provide information in the Location Information and the Phone and Modem Options dialog boxes. To configure Microsoft Fax:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, Communications, Fax, then click/tap Fax Console. The Fax Configuration Wizard opens. 2 On the Welcome to Fax Configuration Wizard screen, click/tap Next. The Sender Information screen opens. 3 Type the information about yourself that you want to appear on your fax cover page, then click/tap Next. The Select Device for Sending or Receiving Faxes screen opens. www.gateway.com 91 Chapter 6: Sending and Receiving Faxes 4 Click/Tap the arrow to open the Please select the fax device list, then click/tap the modem you are using to send and receive faxes. 5 If you want the modem to automatically answer the telephone in order to receive faxes, click/tap the Enable Receive check box. 6 Click/Tap Next. The Transmitting Subscriber Identification (TSID) screen opens. 7 Type the transmitting fax identifier information. This identifier information is required by law. You can type up to 20 characters in the text box. We suggest using eight characters for your identifier name, followed by 12 characters for your telephone number. Important Some fax machines cannot use special characters such as hyphens. We suggest using spaces instead of hyphens in telephone and fax numbers. 8 Click/Tap Next. 9 If you set up your convertible tablet PC to receive faxes, type the receiving fax identifier information, then click/tap Next. This identifier information is required by law and can be the same identifier that you typed in Step 7. The Routing Options screen opens. 92 www.gateway.com Sending a simple fax 10 If you set up your convertible tablet PC to receive faxes, select a folder you want to store received faxes in and a printer you want to print received faxes on, then click/tap Next. The Configuration Summary screen opens. 11 Click/Tap Finish. Sending a simple fax You can use the Send Fax Wizard to send a simple one-page fax to one or more recipients. To send a simple fax:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, Communications, Fax, then click/tap Send a Fax. The Send Fax Wizard opens. 2 On the Welcome to Fax Configuration Wizard screen, click/tap Next. The Recipient Information screen opens. 3 Type the name and fax number of the recipient of your fax. 4 If you need to use the area code for your recipient, click/tap Use dialing rules to type the full ten-digit fax number. www.gateway.com 93 Chapter 6: Sending and Receiving Faxes 5 If you want to send your fax to more than one recipient, click/tap Add and type the name and fax number of the next recipient. 6 When you have added all your recipients, click/tap Next. The Preparing the Cover Page screen opens. 7 Click/Tap the arrow to open the Cover page template, then click/tap the cover page template you want to use. 8 Type the subject text in the Subject line area. 9 Type the message text in the Note area, then click/tap Next. The Schedule screen opens. 10 Select when you want to send the fax and a priority for the fax, then click/tap Next. The Completing the Send Fax Wizard screen opens. 11 Click/Tap Finish. 94 www.gateway.com Setting up your cover page template Setting up your cover page template You can create your own cover page template that you can use in place of the cover page templates that Microsoft Fax provides for you. To create a cover page template, you use the Fax Cover Page Editor. On this template, you insert information fields that automatically import values you enter in both the Send Fax Wizard and the Fax Configuration Wizard when you send your fax. To set up your fax cover page template:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, Communications, Fax, then click/tap Fax Cover Page Editor. The Cover Page-Fax Cover Page Editor opens. If the Cover Page Editor Tips dialog box opens, click/tap OK. 2 If you want to include fields that are imported from either the Send Fax Wizard or the Fax Configuration Wizard (such as To or From), add them to the page by using the Insert menu, then move them to the appropriate place on your template. You can also use the Insert menu to include information that is automatically calculated (such as number of pages or date and time sent). 3 If you want to include text that always appears on your cover page (such as a letterhead or address), draw a box using the text box tool, type your text inside of it, then move the box to the appropriate place on your template. 4 If you want to include a logo that appears on your cover page, copy it to the Windows clipboard, then paste it into the Cover Page Editor and move it to the appropriate place on your template. 5 To save your cover page template, click/tap File, then click/tap Save As. The Save As dialog box opens with your personal cover pages folder already in the Save in list. 6 Type the new cover page template name. 7 Click/Tap Save. www.gateway.com 95 Chapter 6: Sending and Receiving Faxes Faxing from programs To fax a document directly from most programs:

1 Open your document in the program it was created in. 2 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Print. The Print dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Name list, then click/tap the Fax printer. 4 Click/Tap Print or OK. The Send Fax Wizard opens. 5 Complete the wizard by following the instructions in Sending a simple fax on page 93. Faxing a scanned document To fax a document that you have scanned:

1 Scan the document using the program for your scanner. 2 With the scanned file open, click/tap File, then click/tap Print. The Print dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Name list, then click/tap the Fax printer. 4 Click/Tap Print or OK. The Send Fax Wizard opens. 5 Complete the wizard by following the instructions in Sending a simple fax on page 93. 96 www.gateway.com Receiving and viewing a fax Receiving and viewing a fax To receive and view a fax:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, Communications, Fax, then click/tap Fax Console. The Fax Console opens. When the Fax Console is open, it detects incoming faxes and stores them in the Inbox. 2 To view a fax, click/tap Inbox, then double-click/double-tap the fax you want to view. The fax viewer opens, where you can view and print the fax. Canceling a fax You can cancel a fax that you have set up to send at a time in the future. To cancel a fax that has not been sent:

1 If Fax is not open, click/tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, Communications, Fax, then click/tap Fax Console. The Fax Console opens. 2 Click/Tap Outbox, then right-click/button-tap the fax you want to cancel. 3 Click/Tap Delete to cancel the fax. 4 Click/Tap Yes. www.gateway.com 97 Chapter 6: Sending and Receiving Faxes Automatically retry sending a fax You can set up Fax so it continues to try sending your fax if the receiving fax machine is busy. Important Fax is automatically set up to retry three times at ten minute intervals. To automatically retry sending a fax:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. 2 If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. Click/Tap View installed printers or fax printers. The Printers and Faxes window opens.

-OR-

If your Control Panel is in Classic View, double-click/double-tap the Printers and Faxes icon. The Printers and Faxes window opens. 3 Right-click/Button-tap Fax, then click/tap Properties. The Fax Properties dialog box opens. 4 Click/Tap the Devices tab, then click/tap Properties. The Modem dialog box opens. 5 Specify the number of retries and the amount of time between retries. 6 Click/Tap OK. 98 www.gateway.com Automatically cancelling a fax Automatically cancelling a fax If your convertible tablet PC tried to send a fax and failed to connect to a fax machine, you can automatically cancel a failed fax. To automatically cancel a failed fax:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. 2 If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. Click/Tap View installed printers or fax printers. The Printers and Faxes window opens.

-OR-

If your Control Panel is in Classic View, double-click/double-tap the Printers and Faxes icon. The Printers and Faxes window opens. 3 Right-click/Button-tap Fax, then click/tap Properties. The Fax Properties dialog box opens. 4 Click/Tap the Devices tab, then click/tap Properties. The Modem dialog box opens. 5 Click/Tap the Cleanup tab. 6 Click/Tap to select the Automatically delete failed faxes after check box and specify the number of days. 7 Click/Tap OK. www.gateway.com 99 Chapter 6: Sending and Receiving Faxes 100 www.gateway.com 7 Using Multimedia This chapter provides information on using the multimedia capabilities of your convertible tablet PC. Read this chapter to learn how to:

Adjust the volume Record and play audio files Use Windows Media Player Use a DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive Play CDs and DVDs Use MusicMatch Create CDs Use the memory card reader and optional diskette drive Attach a digital camera or digital video camera to your convertible tablet PC View the display on a monitor, projector, or television 101 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Adjusting the volume You can use the volume controls to adjust the overall volume and the volume of specific sound devices in your convertible tablet PC. To adjust the overall volume level using hardware controls:

If you are using external speakers, turn the knob on the front of the speakers.

-OR-

Use the mute and volume control buttons on the keyboard. For more information, see System key combinations on page 30. To adjust the overall volume level from Windows:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Adjust the system volume or Sounds and Audio Devices. The Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog box opens. 102 www.gateway.com 3 Click/Tap the Volume tab. Adjusting the volume 4 Drag the Device Volume slider to change the volume or click/tap to select the Mute check box, then click/tap OK. Help and Support For more information about adjusting the volume, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword adjusting volume in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. To adjust specific volume levels:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Adjust the system volume or Sounds and Audio Devices. The Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog box opens. www.gateway.com 103 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 3 Click/Tap the Volume tab. 4 Click/Tap Advanced in the Device volume area. If the device you want to adjust does not appear in the window, click/tap Options, Properties, the check box next to the audio device you want to adjust, then click/tap OK. 5 Drag the volume level and balance sliders for the device you want to adjust. For more information about the controls, click/tap Help in the window. 6 Click/Tap X in the top-right corner of the window to close it. 104 www.gateway.com Recording and playing audio Recording and playing audio Use the following instructions to make an audio recording by speaking into the built-in microphone or an optional external microphone. To make an audio recording:

1 Plug a microphone into the Microphone jack on your convertible tablet PC or port replicator. For the location of the Microphone jack, see Left Side on page 3 and Back on page 280.

-OR-

Use the built-in microphone located on the LCD panel. 2 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, Entertainment, then click/tap Sound Recorder. The Sound Recorder opens. Rewind Play Record Fast Forward Stop

(record), then speak into the microphone. 3 Click/Tap 4 When you finish recording, click/tap 5 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Save As. The Save As dialog box opens. 6 Name the recording, specify the location where you want to save the

(stop). recording, then click/tap Save. The recording is saved. www.gateway.com 105 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia To play an audio recording in Sound Recorder:

1 Open the Sound Recorder. 2 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Open. The Open dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the file you want to play, then click/tap Open. 4 Play the file by clicking/tapping

(play), then stop playing the file by clicking/tapping

(stop). Help and Support For more information about making or playing an audio recording, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword recording audio or playing audio in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 106 www.gateway.com Playing audio and video files with the Windows Media Player Playing audio and video files with the Windows Media Player The Windows Media Player can play several types of audio and video files, including WAV, MIDI, MP3, AU, AVI, and MPEG formats. For more information about using the Windows Media Player, click/tap Help. To play a file using the Windows Media Player:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, then click/tap Windows Media Player. The Windows Media Player opens. Video file information Video screen Play Stop 2 Click/Tap File, then click/tap Open. The Open dialog box opens. Important If the menu bar does not appear, click/tap the show menu bar button. www.gateway.com 107 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 3 Click/Tap the file you want to play, then click/tap Open. 4 Play the file by clicking/tapping

(play), then stop playing the file by clicking/tapping

(stop). Help and Support For more information about playing audio and video using the Windows Media Player, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword Media Player in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Using S/PDIF digital audio To listen to your convertible tablet PC on a stereo system using the S/PDIF digital audio jack, you must activate S/PDIF. Important To use the S/PDIF function on your convertible tablet PC, you must use the Gateway M275 port replicator. For more information, see Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator on page 277. To activate S/PDIF digital audio:

1 Plug one end of the Toslink cable into the S/PDIF digital audio jack on the back of your port replicator. 2 Plug the other end of the Toslink cable into your stereo receiver. 108 www.gateway.com 3 Open the Master Volume window. For more information, see Adjusting the volume on page 102. Using S/PDIF digital audio 4 Click/Tap Advanced in the Master Volume area. If the Advanced button does not appear in the Master Volume area, click/tap Options, then Advanced Controls. 5 Click/Tap Enable SPDIF. www.gateway.com 109 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Changing modules Your convertible tablet PCs modular bays support different bay modules, such as a DVD or combination DVD/CD-RW drive, or a secondary battery. Module bay screw Module bay latch To change bay modules:

1 If you are removing a drive, make sure that the drive is empty. 2 Turn off your convertible tablet PC (do not place it in Standby or Hibernate mode). 3 Close the LCD panel. 4 Disconnect your convertible tablet PC from the optional port replicator

(see Disconnecting from the port replicator on page 283). 5 Turn your convertible tablet PC over so the bottom is facing up. 110 www.gateway.com 6 Remove the module bay screw. Changing modules 7 Slide and hold the module bay latch. The module may move out slightly. Screw 8 Slide the module out. 9 Firmly push the new module straight into the bay until the latch clicks into place. 10 Replace the module bay screw. www.gateway.com 111 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Using the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive You can use your convertible tablet PC to enjoy a wide variety of multimedia features. Identifying drive types Your Gateway convertible tablet PC may contain one of the following drive types. Look on the front of the drive for one of the following logos:

If your drive has this logo... This is your drive type... Use your drive for... DVD drive Combination DVD/CD-RW drive installing programs, playing audio CDs, playing DVDs, and accessing data. You cannot use this drive to create CDs or DVDs. installing programs, playing audio CDs, playing DVDs, accessing data, and recording music and data to CD-R or CD-RW discs. You cannot use this drive to create DVDs. For more information, see Creating CDs using Nero Express on page 136. 112 www.gateway.com Using the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive Inserting a CD or DVD Eject button Manual eject hole Activity indicator Important Some music CDs have copy protection software. You may not be able to play these CDs on your convertible tablet PC. To insert a CD or DVD:

1 Press the eject button on the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. After the disc tray opens slightly, pull the tray completely open. 2 Place the disc in the tray with the label facing up, then press down carefully on the disc until it snaps into place Important When you place a single-sided disc in the tray, make sure that the label side is facing up. If the disc has two playable sides, place the disc so the name of the side you want to play is facing up. www.gateway.com 113 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 3 Push the tray in until it is closed. Listening to CDs You can use the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive on your convertible tablet PC to listen to music CDs. Important Some music CDs have copy protection software. You may not be able to play these CDs on your convertible tablet PC. Listening to CDs Use the Windows Media Player to listen to CDs. For more information about using the Windows Media Player, click/tap Help. You can also use MUSICMATCH to listen to CDs. For more information, see Using MUSICMATCH on page 116. 114 www.gateway.com Listening to CDs To play a CD:

1 Insert a CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 2 If a dialog box opens with a list of CD players, click/tap Windows Media Player. The Windows Media Player opens.

- OR -

If a dialog box does not open with a list of CD players, click/tap Start, All Programs, then click/tap Windows Media Player. The Windows Media Player opens. 3 When the media player opens, click/tap

(play). Play Stop Volume Previous Mute Next www.gateway.com 115 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia If you do not hear sound or you want to change the volume, see Adjusting the volume on page 102. Help and Support For more information about playing CDs, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword playing CDs in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Using MUSICMATCH Using MUSICMATCH, you can:

Play music CDs Create MP3 music files from your music CDs Edit music track information Use your music files to build a music library Listen to Internet Radio For more information on using MusicMatch, see its online help. Playing CDs You can use the MUSICMATCH program to play music CDs. Important Some music CDs have copy protection software. You may not be able to play these CDs on your convertible tablet PC. To play a music CD:

1 To have MUSICMATCH automatically list the album, artist, and track names of your CD, connect to the Internet before inserting your CD. 116 www.gateway.com Using MUSICMATCH 2 Insert the music CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive on your convertible tablet PC. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 3 If an Audio CD dialog box opens, click/tap Play Audio CD using MUSICMATCH Jukebox, then click/tap OK. The musicmatch window opens, the CD begins playing, and the names of the music tracks appear in the playlist area.

- OR -

If a dialog box does not open, click/tap Start, All Programs, MUSICMATCH, then click/tap MUSICMATCH Jukebox. The musicmatch window opens, the CD begins playing, and the names of the music tracks appear in the playlist area. www.gateway.com 117 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Creating MP3 music files Using MUSICMATCH, you can copy the tracks from a music CD to your convertible tablet PCs hard drive as MP3 files. MP3 (MPEG Layer 3) is a standard for digitally compressing high-fidelity music into compact files without noticeably sacrificing quality. MP3 files end in the file extension .MP3. Important Some music CDs have copy protection software. You cannot copy tracks from these CDs. To create MP3 files:

1 To have MUSICMATCH automatically list the album, artist, and track names of your CD, then use that information for naming and storing your MP3 files, connect to the Internet before inserting your CD. 2 Insert a music CD into your DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 118 www.gateway.com Using MUSICMATCH 3 If an Audio CD dialog box opens, click/tap Play Audio CD using MUSICMATCH Jukebox, then click/tap OK. The musicmatch window opens.

- OR -

If a dialog box does not open, click/tap Start, All Programs, MUSICMATCH, then click/tap MUSICMATCH Jukebox. The musicmatch window opens. 4 If the CD is playing, click/tap Stop. 5 In the MUSIC CENTER area, under COPY, click/tap CD -> Files. The MUSICMATCH recorder opens. 6 Click/Tap to clear the check box for any track you do not want to record. www.gateway.com 119 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 7 Click/Tap Start. 8 When a message appears that tells you the CD drive needs to be configured, click/tap OK. After the drive is configured, MUSICMATCH records the tracks to your hard drive as MP3 files. A progress bar appears next to each track as it is recorded. Editing track information After you add a CD track as an MP3 file to your music library, you can edit the tracks information. To edit track information:

1 Open MUSICMATCH. 2 If a CD is playing, click/tap the stop button. 3 In the MUSIC CENTER area, click/tap the track you want to edit. 4 Click/Tap Options, Music Library, then click/tap Edit Track Tag(s). The Edit Track Tag(s) dialog box opens. 120 www.gateway.com 5 Enter information such as track title, lead artist, album, and genre. 6 Click/Tap OK. The new track information appears in the MUSICMATCH playlist, music library, and recorder window. Using MUSICMATCH Building a music library Use MUSICMATCH to build a music library. You can organize your music tracks by categories, find a track quickly by using the sort features, and add information to a music file. You can add music tracks to your music library by:

Creating MP3 files When you create MP3 files from the tracks on your music CD, MUSICMATCH automatically adds these files to your music library. Dragging and Dropping Drag and drop files from Windows Explorer or your desktop to the music library. Downloading files from the Internet When you are connected to the Internet, MP3 files that you download are automatically added to your music library. Caution During the download process, MP3 files may become corrupt. If you are having trouble listening to, or working with, a downloaded file, try downloading the file again. www.gateway.com 121 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Changing the music library display settings To change the music library display settings:

1 In MUSICMATCH, click/tap Options, then click/tap Settings. The Settings window opens. 2 Click/Tap the Music Library tab. 3 Click/Tap an arrow button to open a column list, then click/tap the category that you want to display in the column. 4 When you have finished selecting categories, click/tap OK. 122 www.gateway.com Listening to Internet radio Using MUSICMATCH To listen to an Internet radio station:

1 Connect to the Internet, then open MUSICMATCH. 2 In the MUSIC CENTER area, under PLAY, click/tap Online Music. 3 To select one of the MUSICMATCH Internet radio stations, click/tap Featured Radio Stations or Radio Stations, the radio station, then click/tap the arrow in the play this station box. MusicMatch connects to the station and plays the audio. If you do not see Featured Radio Stations or Radio Stations, drag the scroll bar on the left.

- OR -

To play another Internet radio station, click/tap Broadcast Radio, the appropriate category in the Broadcast Stations list, the radio station, then click/tap the arrow in the play this station box. MusicMatch connects to the station and plays the audio. If you do not see Broadcast Radio, drag the scroll bar on the left. Using advanced features You can also use MusicMatch to create your own music CDs and to download MP3 files to your portable MP3 player. For more information, see the MusicMatch online help. Tips & Tricks See Do More With Gateway for more information about using your convertible tablet PC to play digital music and download music from the Internet. Click Start, then click Do More With Gateway. If you are in the Business Solutions view, click Consumer Solutions. Click Digital Music. www.gateway.com 123 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Playing a DVD A Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) is similar to a standard CD but has greater data capacity. Because of this increased capacity, full-length movies, several albums of music, or several gigabytes of data can fit on a single disc. You can play DVDs with the InterVideo DVD Player program or Windows Media Player. For more information about playing DVDs, click/tap Help in the DVD player program. To play a DVD:

1 Make sure that the speakers are turned on or headphones are plugged in and that the volume is turned up. 2 Turn off your screen saver and standby timers. 3 To play a DVD using InterVideo DVD, click/tap Start, All Programs, DVD, then click/tap DVD Player. The InterVideo DVD Player video screen and control panel open.

-OR-

To play a DVD using Windows Media Player, click/tap Start, All Programs, then click/tap Windows Media Player. The Windows Media Player opens. Important If the InterVideo DVD player is not on your Start menu, and if Windows Media Player cannot play a DVD, you will need to install the InterVideo DVD program. To install the InterVideo DVD program, insert the InterVideo DVD Software disc into your DVD drive and follow the on-screen instructions. 4 Insert a DVD into the DVD drive, then click/tap

(play). The DVD plays. Use the volume controls in the DVD player to adjust the volume. For more information on using the DVD player, see its online help. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 124 www.gateway.com Creating CDs using Roxio Easy CD Creator Help and Support For more information about playing DVDs, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword playing DVDs in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Creating CDs using Roxio Easy CD Creator You can use your DVD/CD-RW to create data CDs, music CDs, or copies of CDs. For more information about your drives capabilities, see Identifying drive types on page 112. Creating data CDs Use Roxio Easy CD Creator to create data CDs. Data CDs are ideal for backing up important files such as tax records, letters, MP3s, digital movies, or photos. For information on creating music CDs, see Creating music CDs on page 130. Important We recommend that you do not use your convertible tablet PC for other tasks while creating CDs. Important If you record copyrighted material on a CD, you need permission from the copyright owner. Otherwise, you may be violating copyright law and be subject to payment of damages and other remedies. If you are uncertain about your rights, contact your legal advisor. www.gateway.com 125 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia To create a data CD:

1 Insert a blank, writable CD into your recordable CD drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 2 If a CD Drive dialog box opens, click/tap Create a CD using Roxio Easy CD Creator, then click/tap OK. The Select a Project window opens.

- OR -

If a dialog box does not open, click/tap Start, All Programs, Roxio Easy CD Creator, then click/tap Project Selector. The Select a Project window opens. make a data CD dataCD project 126 www.gateway.com Creating CDs using Roxio Easy CD Creator 3 Move your pointer over make a data CD, then click/tap dataCD project. The Easy CD Creator window opens. Select Source Files Source Pane Add 4 Click/tap the arrow button to open the Select Source Files list, then click/tap the drive or folder where the files you want to add to the writable CD are located. If you do not see the folder you want, browse through the folders in the Source pane. www.gateway.com 127 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 5 Click/tap the file you want to record (hold down the CTRL or SHIFT key when you click/tap to select multiple files) in the Source pane, then click/tap Add. record 128 www.gateway.com Creating CDs using Roxio Easy CD Creator 6 After you have added all of your files, click/tap record. The Record CD Setup dialog box opens. Start Recording 7 Click/tap Start Recording. Help and Support For more information about creating CDs, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword creating CDs in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 129 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Creating music CDs Use Roxio Easy CD Creator to create music CDs from other music CDs or MP3 files. For information on creating data CDs, see Creating data CDs on page 125. Important We recommend that you do not use your convertible tablet PC for other tasks while creating CDs. Important If you record copyrighted material to a CD, you need permission from the copyright owner. Otherwise, you may be violating copyright law and be subject to payment of damages and other remedies. If you are uncertain about your rights, contact your legal advisor. Important Some CDs have copy protection software. You cannot create MP3 files from these CDs and you may not be able to listen to these CDs on your convertible tablet PC. To create music CDs:

1 Insert a blank, writable CD into your recordable CD drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. Tips & Tricks Most home and car stereos can read CD-R discs, but cannot read CD-RW discs. To make sure that the CD that you create will play on home and car CD players, use a CD-R disc. 130 www.gateway.com Creating CDs using Roxio Easy CD Creator 2 If a CD Drive dialog box opens, click/tap Create a CD using Roxio Easy CD Creator, then click/tap OK. The Select a Project window opens.

- OR -

If a dialog box does not open, click/tap Start, All Programs, Roxio Easy CD Creator, then click/tap Project Selector. The Select a Project window opens. make a music CD musicCD project www.gateway.com 131 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 3 Move your pointer over make a music CD, then click/tap musicCD project. The Easy CD Creator window opens. Select Source Files Source pane Add 4 Click/tap the arrow button to open the Select Source Files list, then click/tap the drive or folder where the music files that you want to add to the writable CD are located. If you do not see the folder you want, browse through the folders in the Source pane. 132 www.gateway.com Creating CDs using Roxio Easy CD Creator 5 Click/tap the file you want to record (hold down the CTRL or SHIFT key when you click/tap to select multiple files) in the Source pane, then click/tap Add. Tips & Tricks You can add any combination of music tracks or MP3 files to a music CD project. You can add up to 99 tracks and files, or up to 650 MB (74-minute CD) or 700 MB

(80-minute CD) of tracks and files to a music CD project. record www.gateway.com 133 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 6 After you have added all of your tracks and files, click/tap record. The Record CD Setup dialog box opens. Start Recording 7 Click/tap Start Recording. When the recording is complete, you may see a Record Complete dialog box. Select the appropriate option. Help and Support For more information about creating CDs, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword creating CDs in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Copying CDs CD Copier can make backup copies of almost any type of CD. Important We recommend that you do not use your convertible tablet PC for other tasks while creating a CD. Important If you record copyrighted material on a CD, you need permission from the copyright owner. Otherwise, you may be violating copyright law and be subject to payment of damages and other remedies. If you are uncertain about your rights, contact your legal advisor. 134 www.gateway.com Creating CDs using Roxio Easy CD Creator To copy a CD:

1 Insert the CD you want to copy into your recordable drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 2 If a dialog box opens, click/tap Take no action. 3 If a CD Drive dialog box opens, click/tap Create a CD using Roxio Easy CD Creator, then click/tap OK. The Select a Project window opens.

- OR -

If a dialog box does not open, click/tap Start, All Programs, Roxio Easy CD Creator, then click/tap Project Selector. The Select a Project window opens. CD copier CD copier www.gateway.com 135 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 4 Move your pointer over CD copier, then click/tap CD copier. The CD Copier window opens. Copy 5 On the Source and Destination tab, click/tap the arrow button to open the Copy from list, then click/tap the recordable drive. 6 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Record to list, then click/tap the recordable drive. 7 Click/Tap Copy. CD Copier copies the information on the source CD to your hard drive, prompts you to insert the blank CD, then copies the information from the hard drive to the blank CD. Help and Support For more information about copying CDs, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword copying CDs in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Creating CDs using Nero Express You can use Nero Express to copy tracks from a music CD to your hard drive, copy or create data CDs, create music CDs, and more. 136 www.gateway.com Creating CDs using Nero Express Important We recommend that you do not use your convertible tablet PC for other tasks while creating CDs. Important If you record copyrighted material on a CD, you need permission from the copyright owner. Otherwise, you may be violating copyright law and be subject to payment of damages and other remedies. If you are uncertain about your rights, contact your legal advisor. Important Some CDs have copy protection software. You cannot create MP3 files from these CDs and you may not be able to listen to these CDs on your convertible tablet PC. www.gateway.com 137 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Creating a data CD To create a data CD:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Burn a CD or Data DVD, Nero Programs, then click/tap Nero Express. Nero Express opens. 2 Insert a blank, writable CD into your recordable drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 3 If a dialog box opens, click/tap Take no action, then click/tap OK. 138 www.gateway.com 4 Move your pointer over Data, then click/tap Data Disc. The Disc Content screen opens. Creating CDs using Nero Express www.gateway.com 139 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 5 Click/Tap Add. The Select Files and Folders dialog box opens. 6 Browse to the folder that contains the files you want to add. You can click/tap the arrow to open the Location list, then click/tap a drive or folder, or you can click/tap folders in the Name list. Press and hold the CTRL key to select multiple files. 7 Click/Tap Add. You can continue to select files and click/tap Add. 8 After you select all your files, click/tap Finished. 140 www.gateway.com

9 Click/Tap Next. The Final Burn Settings screen opens. Creating CDs using Nero Express 10 Click/Tap the arrow to open the Current recorder list, then click/tap your recordable drive. 11 Click/Tap Burn. The Burning Process screen opens and Nero Express burns the files to the CD. 12 When a message tells you that the recording is complete, click/tap OK. 13 Click/Tap Next to return the main Nero Express screen. 14 Click/Tap Exit. www.gateway.com 141 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Copying a CD To copy a music CD or data CD:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Burn a CD or Data DVD, Nero Programs, then click/tap Nero Express. Nero Express opens. 2 Click/Tap Copy entire disc. The Select source and destination screen opens. 3 Insert the music CD or data CD you want to copy into your recordable drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 4 Click/Tap the arrow to open the Source drive list, then click/tap the drive that contains your source disc. 142 www.gateway.com Creating CDs using Nero Express 5 Click/Tap the arrow to open the Destination drive list, then click/tap your recordable drive. 6 Click/Tap Burn. The Neros Title and CD Database dialog box opens. www.gateway.com 143 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 7 Wait until the dialog box closes.

- OR -

Click/Tap Cancel. The Burning Process screen opens. Nero Express copies the tracks or files to your hard drive. 8 A message prompts you to insert a CD. Remove the source CD, insert a blank, writable CD, then wait for the message box to close. Nero Express copies the files from your hard drive to the writable CD. 9 When a message tells you that the recording is complete, click/tap OK. 10 Click/Tap Next to return to the main Nero Express screen. 11 Click/Tap Exit. 144 www.gateway.com Copying music tracks Creating CDs using Nero Express To copy music CD tracks to your hard drive:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Burn a CD or Data DVD, Nero Programs, then click/tap Nero Express. Nero Express opens. 2 Insert the music CD that has the tracks you want to copy into your CD drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 3 If an Audio CD dialog box opens, click/tap Take no action, then click/tap OK. 4 Click/Tap More. The Nero Toolbar opens. www.gateway.com 145 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 5 Click/Tap the Save Tracks icon. The Neros Title and CD Database dialog box opens. 6 Wait until the dialog box closes.

- OR -

Click/Tap Cancel. 146 www.gateway.com 7 If a message box opens, click/tap OK. The Save Tracks dialog box opens. Creating CDs using Nero Express 8 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Output file format list, then click/tap the format you want for the saved tracks. 9 To record all the tracks, click/tap GO. The recording process begins.

- OR -

To record selected tracks, hold down the CTRL key, click/tap the tracks you want, then click/tap GO. The recording process begins. 10 After the recording is complete, click/tap Close. www.gateway.com 147 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Creating a music CD To create a music CD:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Burn a CD or Data DVD, Nero Programs, then click/tap Nero Express. Nero Express opens. 2 Insert a blank, writable CD into your recordable drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 3 If a dialog box opens, click/tap Take no action, then click/tap OK. 4 Move your pointer over Music, then click/tap one of the following options:

Audio CD to create a music CD that will play on all CD players. Nero Express converts MP3 and WMA files to Audio CD format. Audio and Data CD to create a CD that contains tracks and data files. You can play the music files in a CD player and you can view all files on your convertible tablet PC. MP3 Disc to create a CD using MP3 files. You can play the CD on your convertible tablet PC or a player that supports MP3 files. WMA disc to create a CD using WMA files. You can play the CD on your convertible tablet PC or a player that supports WMA files. 148 www.gateway.com The screen you use to add files opens. Creating CDs using Nero Express www.gateway.com 149 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 5 Click/Tap Add. The Select Files and Folders dialog box opens. 6 Browse to the folder that contains the files you want to add. You can click/tap the arrow to open the Location list, then click/tap a drive or folder, or you can click/tap folders in the Name list. Press and hold the CTRL key to select multiple files. 7 Click/Tap Add. You can continue to select files and click/tap Add. 8 After you select all your files, click/tap Finished. 150 www.gateway.com 9 Click/Tap Next. The Final Burn Settings screen opens. Creating CDs using Nero Express 10 Click/Tap the arrow to open the Current recorder list, then click/tap your recordable drive. 11 Click/Tap Burn. The Burning Process screen opens and Nero Express burns the files to the CD. 12 When a message tells you that the recording is complete, click/tap OK. 13 Click/Tap Next to return the main Nero Express screen. 14 Click/Tap Exit. www.gateway.com 151 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Advanced features In addition to Nero Express, you can use:

Nero BackItUp to create a backup of files on your hard drive, then use BackItUp to restore the files you backed up in case of a hard drive failure, virus, or other problem. Nero CD-DVD Speed to test your DVD and DVD/CD-RW drives for transfer rates, load and eject times, seek and access times, and more. Nero Cover Designer to create labels for your CDs and DVDs, covers for your CD and DVD cases, booklets to include with your CDs and DVDs, and more. Nero DriveSpeed to control DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive read speed and spin down time. Nero InfoTool to find out about your drive capabilities and your convertible tablet PC configuration. To use these programs, click/tap Start, All Programs, Burn a CD or Data DVD, Nero Programs, then click/tap the program you want. For more information, see the online help in the programs and the online users guides. To access the users guides, click/tap Start, All Programs, Burn a CD or Data DVD, Users Guides, then click/tap the guide you want. Using the optional diskette drive A diskette drive uses 3.5-inch diskettes (sometimes called floppy disks). Diskettes are useful for storing files or transferring files to another computer. Warning Do not expose diskettes to water or magnetic fields. Exposure could damage the data on the diskette. 152 www.gateway.com Using the optional diskette drive Tips & Tricks If you need to use a diskette drive, Gateway recommends purchasing a USB diskette drive. To order a USB diskette drive, visit the Accessory Store at accessories.gateway.com. Diskette activity indicator Diskette eject button To use a diskette:

1 Plug the diskette drive into a USB port on your convertible tablet PC or port replicator. For the location of your USB ports, see Back on page 6, Left side on page 279, and Back on page 280. 2 Insert the diskette into the diskette drive with the label facing up. 3 To access a file on the diskette, click/tap Start, then click/tap My Computer. Double-click/Double-tap the drive letter (for example, the A: drive), then double-click/double-tap the file name. 4 To remove the diskette, make sure that the diskette activity indicator is off, then press the diskette eject button. www.gateway.com 153 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Using the memory card reader You can use memory cards to transfer pictures from a digital camera to your convertible tablet PC. You can also use the memory card reader to transfer data between your convertible tablet PC and a device that uses memory cards, such as a PDA, MP3 player, or cellular telephone. Memory card types The memory card reader supports the following card types:

Memory Stick MultiMediaCard Secure Digital SmartMedia (3.3V only) 154 www.gateway.com Using the memory card reader Using a memory card To insert a memory card:

1 Insert the memory card into the memory card slot with the label facing up and the arrow on the label pointing towards your convertible tablet PC. Important Insert the SmartMedia card with the label facing down. Your convertible tablet PC only accepts 3.3V SmartMedia cards. 2 To access a file on the memory card, click/tap Start, then click/tap My Computer. Double-click/Double-tap the drive letter (for example, the E:

drive), then double-click/double-tap the file name. To remove a memory card:

Make sure that the memory card reader status indicator (see LCD panel status indicators on page 25) is off, then pull the memory card out of your convertible tablet PC. www.gateway.com 155 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Important Do not use the remove hardware to remove the memory card. icon in the taskbar Connecting a digital camera You can connect most digital cameras to your convertible tablet PCs USB port to transfer pictures. To connect a digital camera:

1 Connect one end of the USB cable to your digital camera, and connect the other end of the cable to the USB port on the right side of your convertible tablet PC. 156 www.gateway.com Connecting a digital camera 2 Use the program that came with your digital camera to transfer the pictures to your convertible tablet PC.

-OR-

Use the Scanner and Camera Wizard to transfer the pictures to your convertible tablet PC.

-OR-

If your digital camera appears as a drive on your convertible tablet PC in the My Computer window, see Working with files and folders on page 64 for information about moving files to your hard drive. Help and Support For more information about using the Scanner and Camera Wizard, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword digital picture in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Tips & Tricks See Do More With Gateway for more information about using your convertible tablet PC to edit, store, and print digital photos. Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Do More With Gateway. If you are in the Business Solutions view, click/tap Consumer Solutions. Click/Tap Digital Photos. www.gateway.com 157 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Connecting a digital video camera Your convertible tablet PC has an IEEE 1394 (also known as Firewire or i.Link) port that can be used to connect to a digital video camera. To find the location of the IEEE 1394 port, see Left Side on page 3. To connect a digital video camera:

Connect one end of the IEEE 1394 cable to your external source, such as a video camera, and connect the other end of the cable to the IEEE 1394 port on the side of your convertible tablet PC. 158 www.gateway.com Editing videos Editing videos Pinnacle Expression is a video capture program that lets you capture and edit full-motion video, single images, and audio through the IEEE 1394 port. You can also use Pinnacle Expression to create video DVDs. For more information about using the Pinnacle Expression, see its online help. To edit a video:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Pinnacle Expression, then click/tap Pinnacle Expression. The program starts. 2 Use Pinnacle Expression to edit your video. Important If Pinnacle Expression is not on your Start menu, install it from the Pinnacle Expression CD. Insert the CD into your DVD drive and follow the instructions in the setup wizard. For more information on using Pinnacle Expression, see its online help and the online guide located on the program CD. Tips & Tricks See Do More With Gateway for more information about using your convertible tablet PC to edit videos. Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Do More With Gateway. If you are in the Business Solutions view, click/tap Consumer Solutions. Click/Tap Digital Video. www.gateway.com 159 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Viewing the display on a projector or monitor You can use your notebook for giving presentations by connecting an external monitor or projector to your monitor (VGA) port. Your notebook supports simultaneous LCD and CRT display. Simultaneous display allows you to control the presentation from your notebook and at the same time face your audience. To use a projector or external monitor:

1 Turn off your convertible tablet PC. 2 Plug the projector or monitor cable into the VGA port on your convertible tablet PC or port replicator. For the location of the VGA port, see Back on page 6 and Back on page 280. 3 Turn on your convertible tablet PC. 4 Plug the projectors or monitors power cord into an AC power source and turn it on. Windows XP recognizes the new hardware and searches for its driver. You may need to install the driver from the disc supplied by the projectors or monitors manufacturer or download the driver from the manufacturers Web site. 5 After the driver is installed, right-click/button-tap any empty space on the desktop, then click/tap Properties. The Display Properties dialog box opens. 160 www.gateway.com 6 Click/Tap the Settings tab. Viewing the display on a projector or monitor 7 Right-click/Button-tap the second monitor icon (labeled 2), then click/tap Attached. 8 Click/Tap Apply. 9 Adjust properties such as Screen Resolution or Color Quality if necessary. 10 Click/Tap OK. Important Press FN+F3 to switch between viewing the display on the LCD panel and viewing the display on the projector or monitor. Important If an external monitor or projector is connected, your convertible tablet PC turns off the LCD panel, but does not enter Standby mode, when the LCD panel is closed. www.gateway.com 161 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia Viewing the display on a television The S-Video out jack on your optional port replicator lets you view your convertible tablet PC display on a television screen using a standard S-Video cable. Important To turn on external video by default, connect the television

(or other external video device) before starting your convertible tablet PC. Important Audio is not transmitted through the S-Video out jack. Use the built-in speakers, a set of headphones or external powered speakers, or connect your convertible tablet PC to a stereo system using the S/PDIF jack to hear sound while playing a DVD. DVD playback to a VCR will be scrambled by copyright protection software. To view your convertible tablet PC display on a television:

1 With your convertible tablet PC off, connect one end of a standard S-Video cable to the S-Video out jack on your port replicator. For the location of the S-Video out jack, see Back on page 280. 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the Video in jack on your television or VCR. 3 Turn on the television or VCR. 4 Start your convertible tablet PC. 5 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Appearance and Themes. 6 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Display icon. The Display Properties dialog box opens. 162 www.gateway.com 7 Click/Tap the Settings tab. Viewing the display on a television 8 Click/Tap Advanced. The Multiple Monitors and Intel Properties dialog box opens. 9 Click/Tap the Intel Extreme Graphics tab. 10 Click/Tap the Graphics Properties button. The Intel Graphics Controller Properties dialog box opens. www.gateway.com 163 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 11 Click/Tap the Television button. Important If the Television button is grayed out, your convertible tablet PC has not detected the television. Make sure that the television is turned on and connected correctly. 12 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Colors list, then click/tap True Color. 13 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Screen Area list, then click/tap 640 by 480. 14 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Video Standard list, then click/tap NTSC-M. Important If you are traveling internationally, you may need to change the video standard. For example, many televisions in Asia use PAL instead of NTSC. 164 www.gateway.com Viewing the display on a television 15 Click/Tap Apply. Your LCD panel will blank out and what was on your LCD panel now appears on your television. Important Your television may be able to run at a higher resolution. If the icons and screen area appear too large on your television, try a different Screen Area value. 16 Click/Tap OK. Changing from one display to another After you have set up the second display on your convertible tablet PC to be a television, you can quickly switch between viewing the display on the LCD panel and viewing it on the television. To... Change the display from the LCD panel to the television Change the display from the television to the LCD panel Press CTRL+ALT+F2 CTRL+ALT+F3 www.gateway.com 165 Chapter 7: Using Multimedia 166 www.gateway.com 8 Managing Power While your convertible tablet PC is running on battery power, you should manage power consumption to get the most use out of the battery. Read this chapter to learn how to:

Check and recharge the battery Recalibrate the battery Change batteries Extend the life of the battery by conserving battery power and using alternate power sources Change power-saving settings 167 Chapter 8: Managing Power Monitoring the battery charge Closely monitor the battery charge. When the battery charge gets low, change the battery or connect to AC power immediately to prevent losing any unsaved work. Monitor the battery charge by:

Double-clicking/Double-tapping the power cord icon or battery icon in the taskbar. The Power Meter dialog box opens. Important If the power cord or battery icon does not appear on the taskbar, click/tap the show hidden icons button. If the icon still does not appear, make sure that Always show icon on the taskbar is checked on the Power Options Properties Advanced tab. See Changing advanced settings on page 181 for more information. Pressing FN+STATUS to view the power status box, which opens in the upper-left corner of the screen. The power status box shows the current power source, the battery charge level, and the power management mode. Looking at the battery charge indicator:

LED blue - battery is fully charged. LED purple - battery is charging. LED blinking red - battery charge is very low. LED solid red - battery is malfunctioning. Important This LED only lights up when your convertible tablet PC is connected to AC power or the battery charge is very low. For the location of the battery charge indicator, see LCD panel status indicators on page 25. Waiting for a Low Battery warning message to appear. If your battery charge indicator displays what looks like an inaccurate charge, you may need to recalibrate the battery. For more information, see Recalibrating the battery on page 170. 168 www.gateway.com Recharging the battery Recharging the battery Both the main and the optional secondary batteries recharge while they are installed and your convertible tablet PC is connected to AC power. While the batteries are recharging, the battery charge indicator turns purple and the battery icon in the taskbar has a lightning bolt

. Important If the power cord or battery icon does not appear on the taskbar, click/tap the show hidden icons button. If the icon still does not appear, make sure that Always show icon on the taskbar is checked on the Power Options Properties Advanced tab. See Changing advanced settings on page 181 for more information. www.gateway.com 169 Chapter 8: Managing Power Recalibrating the battery If your convertible tablet PC unexpectedly goes into Standby mode while you are using it but the battery charge is not low, you may need to recalibrate your battery. You should also recalibrate the battery periodically to maintain the accuracy of the battery gauge. To recalibrate the battery:

1 Connect the AC adapter, then turn on your convertible tablet PC. 2 As soon as it starts and you see a startup screen, press F2. The BIOS Setup utility opens. 3 Open the Advanced menu. 4 Highlight Battery Auto Learning, then select Enabled by pressing the spacebar. 5 Open the Exit menu, then highlight Exit Saving Changes and press ENTER. 6 Select Yes, then press ENTER. The battery recalibration process begins and a screen opens showing you the progress. The entire process will take several hours. Important Do not interrupt the battery recalibration process. If recalibration is interrupted, you must start the process over again. When the recalibration has finished, the message Press [Esc] key to exit appears. 7 Press ESC. The battery charge indicator now displays an accurate battery charge. If the battery charge indicator does not show an accurate charge, contact Gateway Technical Support. 170 www.gateway.com Changing batteries Changing batteries If your convertible tablet PC is plugged into an AC outlet or if it has a charged secondary battery installed, you can change the main battery while the convertible tablet PC is turned on. If your convertible tablet PC has only one battery and it is not plugged into an AC outlet, you must turn the convertible tablet PC off while changing the batteries. Warning Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with a Gateway M275 battery (M275DAZ or equivalent). Discard used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mishandled. Do not disassemble, heat above 212F (100C), or incinerate. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Battery latch Battery Battery lock www.gateway.com 171 Chapter 8: Managing Power Replacing the main battery To replace the main battery:

1 If your convertible tablet PC is on and is connected to AC power or has a charged secondary battery installed, go to Step 2.

-OR-

If your convertible tablet PC is on and is not plugged into an AC outlet and does not have a charged secondary battery installed, save your work and turn off the convertible tablet PC. 2 Close the LCD panel. 3 Disconnect your convertible tablet PC from the optional port replicator

(see Disconnecting from the port replicator on page 283). 4 Turn your convertible tablet PC over so the bottom is facing up. 5 Slide the battery lock to the unlocked position, then slide the battery release latch. 172 www.gateway.com 6 Lift the battery out of the bay. Changing batteries 7 Place a recharged battery into the bay and press down until it snaps into place. 8 Slide the battery lock to the locked position. 9 Turn your convertible tablet PC over and reattach the optional port replicator. 10 Open the LCD panel and slide the power switch. www.gateway.com 173 Chapter 8: Managing Power Installing a secondary battery Your convertible tablet PCs modular bay accepts a secondary battery. The secondary battery charges when the convertible tablet PC is connected to AC power. Warning Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with a Gateway M275 battery (M275DAZ or equivalent). Discard used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mishandled. Do not disassemble, heat above 212F (100C), or incinerate. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. To install a secondary battery:

1 If you are removing a drive, make sure that the drive is empty. 2 Turn off your convertible tablet PC (do not place it in Standby or Hibernate mode). 3 Close the LCD panel. 4 Disconnect your convertible tablet PC from the optional port replicator

(see Disconnecting from the port replicator on page 283). 5 Turn your convertible tablet PC over so the bottom is facing up. 174 www.gateway.com 6 Remove the module bay screw. Changing batteries 7 Slide and hold the module bay latch. The module may move out slightly. Screw 8 Slide the module out. 9 Firmly push the secondary battery straight into the bay until the latch clicks into place. 10 Replace the module bay screw. www.gateway.com 175 Chapter 8: Managing Power Extending battery life Conserving battery power While using the battery to power your convertible tablet PC, conserve power by:

Dimming the display as low as is comfortable. Removing PC Cards when you do not need them. Many PC Cards use a small amount of power while inserted, even if they are not being used. Modifying the power management settings for maximum power savings. For more information, see Changing power settings on page 178. Closing the LCD panel to turn off the display while you are not using your convertible tablet PC. The display stays off until you open the panel again. Using Hibernate mode for maximum power savings while your convertible tablet PC is not in use. For more information, see Activating and using Hibernate mode on page 182. Using the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive only when necessary. These drives use a large amount of power. Recharging the battery often, taking an extra battery, and fully recharging the batteries before traveling. For more information, see Recharging the battery on page 169 and Changing batteries on page 171. Using alternate power sources To extend battery life, use alternate power sources whenever possible. If traveling internationally, take electrical adapters. Save the battery for times when you cannot use a power adapter. If you plan on taking your AC power adapter, also take a single-plug surge protector. If you will have access to an automobile cigarette lighter, use a power inverter or automobile/airplane adapter. Save the battery for times when you cannot use a power adapter. To find AC power outlets in airports, look for them next to support pillars, in large areas such as boarding gates, and under banks of telephones. 176 www.gateway.com Extending battery life Changing power modes You can use the following power modes to lengthen the life of your convertible tablet PCs battery:

Standby - while your convertible tablet PC is in Standby, it switches to a low power state where devices, such as the display and drives, turn off. Hibernate - (also called save to disk) writes all current memory (RAM) information to the hard drive, then turns your convertible tablet PC completely off. The next time you turn on your convertible tablet PC, it reads the memory information from the hard drive and opens the programs and documents that were open when you activated Hibernate mode. For more information on using Hibernate mode, see Activating and using Hibernate mode on page 182. Using power saving modes Always save your work before using Standby mode. In Standby mode, your convertible tablet PC reduces or turns off the power to most devices except memory. However, the information in memory is not saved to the hard drive. If power is interrupted, the information is lost. When in Hibernate mode, your convertible tablet PC saves all memory information to the hard drive, then turns the power completely off. If your convertible tablet PC is... On On

...and you want to... ..then Enter Standby mode Press FN+STANDBY.

-OR-

Close the LCD panel. Enter Hibernate mode

(must be activated) Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Turn Off Computer. Press and hold SHIFT, then click/tap Hibernate. In Standby or Hibernate mode Exit Standby or Hibernate mode Slide the power switch. www.gateway.com 177 Chapter 8: Managing Power Changing power settings You can change the function of the power switch, Standby system key, and power-saving timers by changing power settings on your convertible tablet PC. You can customize power settings from the Windows Control Panel by selecting power schemes, setting power alarms, adjusting advanced power settings, and activating Hibernate mode. Power schemes (groups of power settings) let you change power saving options such as when the display or hard drive is automatically turned off. You can select one of the defined power schemes or create a custom power scheme. Important The processor installed in your convertible tablet PC may use Intel SpeedStep technology to conserve battery power. A SpeedStep-equipped processor can change its operating speed according to the power source. Your convertible tablet PCs default settings operate the processor at full speed while connected to AC power and at reduced speed (which uses less power) while using battery power. Power schemes also set the speed of an Intel SpeedStep-equipped processor. Alarms can alert you when the battery charge is low. Advanced power settings let you assign different power saving modes to the power switch and Standby system key. You can also select which power saving mode is activated when you close the LCD panel. 178 www.gateway.com Changing power settings Changing the power scheme To change the power scheme:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Performance and Maintenance. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Power Options icon. The Power Options Properties dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Power Schemes list, then click/tap the power scheme you want.

- OR -

Set the timers, then click/tap Save As and type a name for the scheme. 4 Click/Tap OK. www.gateway.com 179 Chapter 8: Managing Power Help and Support For more information about changing the power scheme, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword power scheme in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Changing alarm options To change the alarm options:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Performance and Maintenance. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Power Options icon. The Power Options Properties dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the Alarms tab. 4 Adjust the alarm settings. 5 Click/Tap OK. 180 www.gateway.com Changing power settings Help and Support For more information about changing the alarm options, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword alarm options in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Changing advanced settings To change advanced power management settings:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Performance and Maintenance. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Power Options icon. The Power Options Properties dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the Advanced tab. 4 Click/Tap the arrow button to open a Power buttons list, then click/tap the power setting mode you want to use. www.gateway.com 181 Chapter 8: Managing Power 5 Click/Tap OK. Help and Support For more information about changing the power management settings, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword power management in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Activating and using Hibernate mode To activate Hibernate mode:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Performance and Maintenance. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Power Options icon. The Power Options Properties dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the Hibernate tab. 182 www.gateway.com Changing power settings 4 Click/Tap the Enable hibernation check box, then click/tap Apply. Hibernate mode is now an option you can select on the Advanced tab in the Power Options Properties dialog box and in the Turn Off Computer or Shut Down Windows dialog box. To use Hibernate mode:

As an automatic power savings mode:

Open the Power Options Properties dialog box, then click/tap the Power Schemes tab. Click/Tap the arrow button to open a System hibernates list, then click/tap the time you want to use.

- OR -

Open the Power Options Properties dialog box, then click/tap the Advanced tab. Hibernate is now an option in the Power buttons lists. As a manually-selected power savings mode, click/tap Start, then click/tap Turn Off Computer. Press and hold SHIFT, then click/tap Hibernate. Help and Support For more information about using Hibernate mode, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword hibernate in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 183 Chapter 8: Managing Power 184 www.gateway.com Traveling With Your Gateway M275 9 These tips can make traveling with your convertible tablet PC more convenient and trouble-free. Read this chapter to learn about:

Using the modem Using your radio frequency wireless connections Transferring files Protecting your convertible tablet PC from loss and theft Managing your convertible tablet PCs power efficiently Tips & Tricks You can download an electronic copy of this guide from support.gateway.com/support/manlib/. 185 Chapter 9: Traveling With Your Gateway M275 Packing your convertible tablet PC Remove all peripheral devices and cables. Remember to pack those you will need while traveling, and do not forget to pack at least one convertible tablet PC pen. Protect the pen by keeping it in your convertible tablet PCs pen holder during travel. For more information, see Right Side on page 5. Pack the Gateway convertible tablet PC securely into a briefcase or hand-carried luggage, and keep it separate from toiletries, liquids, and food. Do not pack it in checked luggage. Keep your convertible tablet PC stable during travel. Secure it to prevent it from sliding around in overhead bins and car trunks. Traveling by air Prepare for airport security by charging the battery in case Security asks you to start your convertible tablet PC. Have your convertible tablet PC hand-inspected or sent through the X-ray scanner, but never carry it through the metal detector. Turn off your convertible tablet PC for takeoff and landing. Do not check your convertible tablet PC as baggage. Turn off wireless RF devices such as your wireless Ethernet emitter while the aircraft is moving. For more information, see Turning your wireless Ethernet emitter on or off on page 220. 186 www.gateway.com Modem Modem Take a telephone cord to connect the modem to telephone jacks. If you are traveling internationally, take telephone jack adapters or an acoustic handset coupler. Take a telephone line protector. Take a telephone line tester to check for unsafe lines, especially if you are traveling internationally. Take remote access information with you so you can connect to your ISP while outside of your usual calling area. A list of country dialing codes may be especially useful if you are traveling internationally. Radio frequency wireless connections Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. If your convertible tablet PC is equipped with a wireless device, check with the local radio approval authorities prior to your trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country. If your convertible tablet PC came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, see Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information on page 315 for general wireless regulatory guidelines. Wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, and IEEE 802.11g communication devices are examples of devices which use wireless to communicate. For instructions on how to turn off your wireless device, see Turning your wireless Ethernet emitter on or off on page 220. www.gateway.com 187 Chapter 9: Traveling With Your Gateway M275 Files Copy your working files from your desktop computer to your convertible tablet PC before you travel. If you need to access your desktop computer files from your convertible tablet PC while traveling, set up your desktop computer for remote access. Contact your network administrator for more information about remote access. Take extra recordable media for transferring files between computers and backing up files. Security Get a locking cable for your convertible tablet PC so you can attach a cable lock and leave your convertible tablet PC in your hotel room while you are away. Always keep your convertible tablet PC with you while waiting in airports, train stations, or bus terminals. Be ready to claim your convertible tablet PC as soon as it passes through the x-ray machine in security checkpoints. Write down your convertible tablet PC model number and serial number

(see Identifying your model on page 10) in case of theft or loss, and keep the information in a safe place. Also, tape your business card or an address label to your convertible tablet PC and accessories. Whoever sits next to you or behind you can see your convertible tablet PC display. Avoid working with confidential files until you can be sure of privacy. Use a startup password to restrict access to your convertible tablet PC. Important Use a password that you can remember, but that is difficult for someone else to guess. The password feature is very secure, with no easy way to recover a forgotten password. If you forget your password, you must return your convertible tablet PC to Gateway for service. Call Gateway Technical Support for instructions. 188 www.gateway.com Power To create a startup password:

1 Restart your convertible tablet PC. As soon as you see a startup screen, press F2. The BIOS Setup utility opens. 2 Open the Security menu, then highlight Set Supervisor Password, then press ENTER and follow the instructions. You must set the supervisor password in order to set the user (startup) password. 3 Highlight Set User Password, then press ENTER and follow the instructions. This is the password you need to enter at startup. 4 Highlight Password on boot, then select Enabled by pressing the spacebar. 5 Open the Exit menu, highlight Exit Saving Changes, then press ENTER. When you start your convertible tablet PC, you are prompted to enter the user password you set in Step 3. Power Take your AC power adapter to recharge the battery. If you are traveling internationally, take power plug adapters. Take a portable surge protector to protect your convertible tablet PC from power surges. To get the best performance from your convertible tablet PC, avoid using the battery whenever possible, monitor the battery charge, and use the most efficient power management settings. For information on conserving battery power, see Conserving battery power on page 176. For information on using alternate power sources, see Using alternate power sources on page 176. For information on monitoring the battery charge, see Monitoring the battery charge on page 168. www.gateway.com 189 Chapter 9: Traveling With Your Gateway M275 Additional tips If you plan to use several USB peripheral devices, take a portable USB hub to provide additional USB ports. Take a network cable if you need to connect to a network. Some hotels provide Internet connectivity only through their networks. If your convertible tablet PC has been exposed to cold temperatures, allow it to warm to room temperature before turning it on. Carry proof of ownership or a merchandise passport when traveling internationally. Consult your insurance company and credit card company to learn about emergency travel assistance if your convertible tablet PC is lost or damaged. Take your System Restoration CDs in case you need to install an additional driver or software. 190 www.gateway.com Customizing Your Gateway M275 10 This chapter provides information about customizing your convertible tablet PC by changing settings in Windows. Read this chapter to learn how to:

Change screen and display settings Change the background and screen saver Adjust the touchpad settings Add, change, and switch user accounts 191 Chapter 10: Customizing Your Gateway M275 Using the display Changing display orientation You can change the display orientation from the default, landscape (horizontal), to portrait (vertical) or secondary landscape (180 degrees from the default) Screen Rotation button. For more information, see LCD panel buttons on page 32. To change display orientation:

Press Screen Rotation button to step through display orientations. To change orientation properties:

Double-click/Double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon then click/tap the Display tab. in the taskbar, Adjusting brightness To adjust screen brightness:

Use the increase brightness and decrease brightness buttons on the keyboard. For more information, see System key combinations on page 30. To use brightness boost:

Use the brightness boost.... For more information, see LCD panel buttons on page 32. 192 www.gateway.com Adjusting the screen and desktop settings Adjusting the screen and desktop settings Adjusting the color depth and screen area are two of the most basic display settings you may need to change. You can also adjust settings such as the screen background and screen saver. Adjusting the color depth Color depth is the number of colors your screen displays. Various image types require various color depths for optimum appearance. For example, simple color drawings may appear adequately in 256 colors while color photographs need millions of colors to be displayed with optimum quality. Windows lets you choose from several color depth settings. We recommend that you use the 32-bit True Color setting at all times. If the color in your images seems false or jumpy, especially after you have played a game or run a video-intensive program, check the color depth setting and return it to 32-bit True Color, if necessary. To change the color depth:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Appearance and Themes. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Display icon. The Display Properties dialog box opens. www.gateway.com 193 Chapter 10: Customizing Your Gateway M275 3 Click/Tap the Settings tab. 4 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Color quality list, then click/tap the color depth you want. 5 To save your changes, click/tap OK, then click/tap Yes. Help and Support For more information about adjusting display settings, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword changing display settings in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 194 www.gateway.com Adjusting the screen and desktop settings Adjusting the screen resolution You can increase the screen resolution to fit more icons on your desktop, or you can decrease the resolution to make reading the display easier. The higher the resolution, the smaller individual components of the screen (such as icons and menu bars) appear. To adjust the screen resolution:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Appearance and Themes. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Display icon. The Display Properties dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the Settings tab. 4 Drag the Screen resolution slider to the size you prefer. 5 To save your changes, click/tap OK, then click/tap Yes. www.gateway.com 195 Chapter 10: Customizing Your Gateway M275 Help and Support For more information about adjusting screen resolution, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword changing screen resolution in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Changing the colors on your Windows desktop You can change the colors of Windows desktop items, such as the background color and dialog box title bars. To change desktop colors:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Appearance and Themes. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Display icon. The Display Properties dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the Appearance tab. 196 www.gateway.com Adjusting the screen and desktop settings 4 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Color scheme list, click/tap the color scheme you want, then click/tap OK. The new colors appear on your desktop.

- OR -

If you want to create a new color scheme as part of a desktop theme:

a Click/Tap Advanced. The Advanced Appearance dialog box opens. b Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Item list, then click/tap the item you want to change. c Change the color or font settings for the item. d Click/Tap OK, then click/tap the Themes tab. e Click/Tap Save As, type a name for the new theme, then click/tap OK twice. The new colors appear on your desktop. Changing the desktop background You can change the Windows desktop background picture. Windows provides several backgrounds, or you can use pictures that you have created or retrieved from other sources. To change the desktop background:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Appearance and Themes. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Display icon. The Display Properties dialog box opens. www.gateway.com 197 Chapter 10: Customizing Your Gateway M275 3 Click/Tap the Desktop tab. 4 Click/Tap a background picture in the Background list.

- OR -

Click/Tap Browse to select a background picture from another location. 5 If you want the picture you chose to cover the entire screen, click/tap the arrow button to open the Position list, then click/tap Stretch or Tile. 6 If the picture you chose does not cover the entire screen and you did not choose to stretch or tile the image in Step 5, you can change the solid color behind the picture by clicking/tapping the arrow button to open the Color list, then clicking/tapping a color. 7 Click/Tap OK. Help and Support For more information about changing the background, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword changing desktop background in the Search box arrow.

, then click/tap the 198 www.gateway.com Adjusting the screen and desktop settings Selecting a screen saver You can use a screen saver to keep others from viewing your display while you are away from your convertible tablet PC. Windows supplies a variety of screen savers that you can choose from, and many more are available from the Internet and as commercial products. To select a screen saver:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Appearance and Themes. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Display icon. The Display Properties dialog box opens. 3 Click/Tap the Screen Saver tab. 4 Click/Tap the arrow button to open the Screen Saver list, then click/tap the screen saver you want. Windows previews the screen saver. 5 If you want to customize the screen saver, click/tap Settings, then make your changes. If the Settings button is not available, you cannot customize the screen saver you selected. www.gateway.com 199 Chapter 10: Customizing Your Gateway M275 6 If you want to display the Welcome (Login) screen whenever you exit the screen saver, click/tap the On resume, display Welcome screen check box. 7 If you want to change the time before the screen saver is activated, click/tap the up or down arrows next to the Wait box. 8 Click/Tap OK. Help and Support For more information about selecting a screen saver, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword screen savers in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Adjusting tablet and pen settings Windows XP tablet PC Edition includes a control panel for adjusting pen, display, and button preferences such as:

Right-handed vs. left-handed use Pen calibration in portrait and landscape modes Button functions Pen actions such as double-tapping To change tablet and pen settings:

1 Double-click/Double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon The Tablet and Pen Properties dialog box opens. 2 Click/Tap the Pen Options tab. 3 Change the pen options settings, then click/tap OK. in the taskbar. 200 www.gateway.com Programming the buttons Programming the buttons Most of the LCD panel buttons on your convertible tablet PCs can be reprogrammed with new functions. For more information, see LCD panel buttons on page 32. To reprogram button functions:

1 Double-click/Double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon The Tablet and Pen Properties dialog box opens. 2 Click/Tap the Tablet Buttons tab. 3 Change the button settings, then click/tap OK. in the taskbar. www.gateway.com 201 Chapter 10: Customizing Your Gateway M275 Adjusting the Tablet PC Input Panel Settings To adjust writing pad, writing tools, and speech settings:

1 Click/Tap 2 Click/Tap Tools, then click/tap Options.

(the Keyboard icon). 3 Click/Tap a tab, then change the input panel settings. 202 www.gateway.com Changing the touchpad settings Changing the touchpad settings You can adjust the double-click speed, pointer speed, left-hand or right-hand configuration, and other touchpad settings. To change your touchpad settings:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Mouse icon. The Mouse Properties dialog box opens. www.gateway.com 203 Chapter 10: Customizing Your Gateway M275 3 Click/Tap the Device Settings tab, then click/tap Settings to change your touchpad settings. 4 To modify a touchpad setting, click/tap the + in front of a setting, then modify the setting. 5 To assign a function to the rocker switch, click the + in front of Buttons, click the up or down button, then click the action you want. 6 Click/Tap OK to save changes. Help and Support For more information about changing mouse settings, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword mouse settings in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 204 www.gateway.com Adding and modifying user accounts Adding and modifying user accounts You can create and customize a user account for each person who uses your convertible tablet PC. You can also switch (change) user accounts without turning off your convertible tablet PC. User account tips If you want to create an account for someone, but you do not want that user to have full access to your convertible tablet PC, be sure to make that account limited. Remember that limited accounts may not be able to install some older programs. If a program or peripheral device is installed in one account, it may not be available in other accounts. If this happens, install the program or device in the accounts that need it. Files created in one account are not accessible from other accounts unless the files are stored in the Shared Documents folder. The Shared Documents folder is accessible from all accounts on that computer and from other computers on the network. To add, delete, or modify user accounts:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the User Accounts icon. The User Accounts window opens. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to add, delete, or modify a user account. Help and Support For more information about user accounts, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword user accounts in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 205 Chapter 10: Customizing Your Gateway M275 To switch user accounts:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Log Off. The Log Off Windows dialog box opens. 2 Click/Tap Switch User. The Windows Welcome screen opens. 3 Click/Tap the user account that you want to use. When you switch between user accounts, any programs that were running for the previous user continue to run. 206 www.gateway.com 11 Networking Your Gateway M275 Connecting your home, small office, or home office computers lets you share drives, printers, and a single Internet connection among the connected computers. Read this chapter to learn about:

Benefits of using a network in your home, small office, or home office Types of network connections Purchasing additional network equipment Installing and configuring your convertible tablet PC for Ethernet networking Turning the wireless Ethernet emitter on and off 207 Chapter 11: Networking Your Gateway M275 Benefits of networking A network lets you:

Share a single Internet connection Share computer drives Share peripheral devices Stream audio and video files Play multi-player games Sharing a single Internet connection Each computer that is connected to the network can share the same broadband connection or modem and telephone line and access the Internet at the same time. This saves on the cost of installing another telephone line for your second computer and paying for a second Internet service provider (ISP) account. Help and Support For more information about sharing an Internet connection, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword internet sharing in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Sharing drives With a network, you can copy files from computer to computer by copying and pasting or dragging and dropping. You will no longer waste your time transferring files by using recordable media. In addition, you can map a drive on a networked computer to another computer, and access the files as if they were located on the hard drive of the computer you are using. Help and Support For more information about sharing network drives, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword sharing network drives in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 208 www.gateway.com Benefits of networking Sharing peripheral devices Each computer that is connected to the network can share the same peripheral devices, such as a printer. Select print from the computer you are currently using and your file is automatically printed on your printer no matter where it is located on your network. Help and Support For more information about sharing network devices, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword sharing in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Streaming audio and video files With a network, you can store audio files (such as the popular .MP3 files) and video files on any networked computer, then play them on any of the other computers or devices connected to your network. This process is called streaming. Help and Support For more information about streaming files, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword streaming in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Playing multi-player games With a home network, you can play multi-player games. Load a game like Microsoft Midtown Madness 2 on your computers, and in minutes, you and your friends can race in competing cars through the streets of San Francisco. Help and Support For more information about playing multi-player games, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword games or network games in the Search box arrow.

, then click/tap the www.gateway.com 209 Chapter 11: Networking Your Gateway M275 Selecting a network connection The biggest decision you need to make when creating your network is what type of connection you will use. Gateway supports both wired and wireless Ethernet networks. Use the following criteria as a guide when selecting a network connection. Wired Ethernet network Create a wired Ethernet network if:

You are building a new home or your existing home already has Ethernet cable installed in each room that has a device you want to connect You are creating a network in an office or business where network speed is more important than moving about with your computer Your computer has an Ethernet jack for connecting to the network Wireless Ethernet network Create a wireless Ethernet (IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, or IEEE 802.11g) network if:

You are looking for an alternative to installing cable for connectivity The ability to move about with your computer is as important as network speed Your computer has wireless Ethernet for networking Help and Support For more information about selecting network connections, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword networks or network types in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 210 www.gateway.com

Using a wired Ethernet network Using a wired Ethernet network A wired Ethernet network consists of two or more computers connected together through an Ethernet cable. This connection type is commonly used in offices around the world and can be used to build computer networks in the home. Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, or Gigabit Ethernet Ethernet is available at three different speeds. Standard Ethernet runs at 10 Mbps, Fast Ethernet runs at 100 Mbps, and Gigabit Ethernet runs at 1000 Mbps. Most home networks are built using Standard or Fast Ethernet components. Business networks are typically built using Fast or Gigabit Ethernet components. To create a wired Ethernet network, you or your electrician must:

Install special Ethernet cables in your home or office Important Check local code requirements before installing Ethernet cable or other wiring in your home or office. Your municipality may require you to obtain a permit and hire a licensed installer. Install an Ethernet card in each of your desktop computers (if your computers do not already have built-in Ethernet jacks) Install an Ethernet PC Card in each of your notebooks or convertible tablet PCs (if your notebooks or convertible tablet PCs do not already have built-in Ethernet jacks) Install an Ethernet router, switch, or hub Tips & Tricks If you are connecting just two computers (known as a peer-to-peer wired Ethernet network), you can eliminate the router, switch, or hub and use a special crossover cable. www.gateway.com 211 Chapter 11: Networking Your Gateway M275 Example wired Ethernet network The following is an example of a wired Ethernet network. The network is made up of a router, a cable or DSL modem, your computers, and cables connecting each of these components. The router is the central control point for the network. Attached to the router are all of your computers or Ethernet-ready devices. Also connected to the router is a cable or DSL modem that provides access to the Internet. Cable/DSL modem Router, switch, or hub Tips & Tricks To add the ability to access a wireless Ethernet network to your wired Ethernet network, connect an access point to the router, switch, or hub. For more information about accessing a wireless Ethernet, see Using a wireless Ethernet network on page 214. 212 www.gateway.com Using a wired Ethernet network Equipment you need for a wired Ethernet network For a wired Ethernet network you need:

An Ethernet jack on each desktop computer, notebook, tablet PC, and convertible tablet PC.

- OR -

An Ethernet card (also called network interface cards or NICs) installed in each desktop computer.

- OR -

An Ethernet PC Card installed in each notebook or convertible tablet PC. An Ethernet router. Select a router that gives you the following features:

A jack for connecting to a cable or DSL modem. The ability to assign IP addresses to your networked computers dynamically. This prevents intruders from seeing the computers over the Internet. A built-in firewall to protect the computers on your network from intruders trying to access your data over the Internet. Built-in switching (with enough ports for all computers and devices on the network) so you will not have to purchase a hub or switch. If you did not purchase a router that includes built-in switching or if the router does not have enough ports to attach all of your computers, an Ethernet hub or switch with enough ports for all computers and devices in the network. Ethernet cable going from each computer to the router, hub, or switch. Important For best results, all Ethernet components should be either standard Ethernet (10 Mbps), Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps or 10/100), or Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps or 10/100/1000). A mixture of components rated at different speeds will result in your network running at the speed of the slowest rated component. www.gateway.com 213 Chapter 11: Networking Your Gateway M275 Using a wireless Ethernet network A wireless Ethernet network is ideal for creating a home or office network or adding mobility to an existing wired Ethernet network. A wireless Ethernet network allows you the freedom to move about your home or office with your notebook, tablet PC, or convertible tablet PC. For example, you can take your notebook, tablet PC, or convertible tablet PC from your home office to your patio without having an Ethernet jack available. Warning Important Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, and IEEE 802.11g communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication. For instructions to turn wireless Ethernet on and off, see Turning your wireless Ethernet emitter on or off on page 220. If your convertible tablet PC came equipped with an internal radio frequency wireless device, see Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information on page 315 for general wireless regulatory and safety guidelines. To find out if your convertible tablet PC has an internal wireless device, check the label (see Identifying your model on page 10) or the device manager. 214 www.gateway.com Using a wireless Ethernet network Wireless Ethernet speed and frequency Wireless Ethernet is available at two different speeds and at two different frequencies. The following table compares the various wireless Ethernet network types. Network Type Speed Frequency Advantages Disadvantages IEEE 802.11a 54 Mbps 5 GHz Less possible interference than IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11b 11 Mbps 2.4 GHz Large number of access points already exist in airports, college campuses, and businesses Compatible with IEEE 802.11g networks Longer range (100 to 150 feet) than IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11g 54 Mbps 2.4 GHz Compatible with IEEE 802.11b networks Longer range (100 to 150 feet) than IEEE 802.11a Shorter range (25 to 75 feet) than IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g Not compatible with IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g networks Possible interference from cordless phones and microwaves Not compatible with IEEE 802.11a networks Possible interference from cordless phones and microwaves Not compatible with IEEE 802.11a networks Important The speed of a wireless network is related to signal strength. Signal strength is affected by the distance between your wireless network devices, by radio interference, and by interference from natural obstructions such as walls, floors, and doors. The two most common types of wireless Ethernet networks are access point and peer-to-peer. www.gateway.com 215 Chapter 11: Networking Your Gateway M275 Example access point wireless Ethernet network By using an access point, you can join a wireless Ethernet network and access a wired Ethernet network. The following example shows how an access point also lets you access the Internet. The following is an example of an access point wireless Ethernet network. The network is made up of an access point, a cable or DSL modem, and your computers. The access point is the central control point for the network. Attached to the access point is the cable or DSL modem that provides access to the Internet. Each of the computers or Ethernet-ready devices communicate with the access point using radio waves. If your computer does not have built-in wireless Ethernet capabilities, you need to add a wireless PCI card (desktop), PC card (notebook or convertible tablet PC), or USB adapter. Cable/DSL modem Access point USB wireless adapter Tips & Tricks If you want to access a wireless Ethernet network from your wired Ethernet network, connect an access point to the router, switch, or hub. For more information about accessing a wired Ethernet, see Using a wired Ethernet network on page 211. 216 www.gateway.com Using a wireless Ethernet network Equipment you need for an access point wireless Ethernet network For an access point wireless Ethernet network you need:

A wireless Ethernet PCI card installed in each desktop computer

- OR -

A wireless Ethernet USB adapter attached to each desktop or notebook computer, or convertible tablet PC

- OR -

A notebook, tablet PC, or convertible tablet PC with wireless Ethernet built-in

- OR -

A wireless Ethernet PC Card installed in each notebook or convertible tablet PC that does not have wireless Ethernet built-in A wireless Ethernet access point to connect your wireless Ethernet network to the Internet or a wired Ethernet network Important IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g use the same radio frequency. IEEE 802.11a uses a different radio frequency than IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g. All wireless Ethernet components must use the same frequency. A combination of IEEE 802.11a and IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11a and IEEE 802.11g components will not work. Some wireless devices can broadcast and receive signals on both frequencies. A mixture of IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g components will result in your network running at the speed of the slower IEEE 802.11b components. www.gateway.com 217 Chapter 11: Networking Your Gateway M275 Example peer-to-peer wireless Ethernet network Use a peer-to-peer (also known as ad hoc) wireless Ethernet network if you are setting up or joining a temporary computer-to-computer network. This type of network does not include access into a wired network or the Internet. You can create this type of network to quickly move files from one computer to another. 218 www.gateway.com Using a wireless Ethernet network Equipment you need for a peer-to-peer wireless Ethernet network For a peer-to-peer wireless Ethernet network you need:

A wireless Ethernet PCI card installed in each desktop computer

- OR -

A wireless Ethernet USB adapter attached to each desktop or notebook computer or convertible tablet PC

- OR -

A notebook, tablet PC, or convertible tablet PC with wireless Ethernet built-in

- OR -

A wireless Ethernet PC Card installed in each notebook or convertible tablet PC that does not have wireless Ethernet built-in For more information For more information about purchasing equipment for your home or office Ethernet network, discuss your particular needs with your Gateway representative. In addition, several books and Internet sites are dedicated to networking (for example: www.homenethelp.com). See these sources for more information about networking your home or office with wired or wireless Ethernet. Help and Support For more information about networking, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword networking in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 219 Chapter 11: Networking Your Gateway M275 Using your convertible tablet PC on a network Installing and configuring your convertible tablet PC for Ethernet networking The Setting Up Your Windows Network guide has been included on your hard drive. It provides instructions for installing and configuring both wired and wireless Ethernet networking on your convertible tablet PC. To access this guide, click/tap Start, All Programs, then click/tap Gateway Documentation. Turning your wireless Ethernet emitter on or off Warning Warning Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, and IEEE 802.11g communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication. In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device. 220 www.gateway.com Using your convertible tablet PC on a network To turn the wireless Ethernet emitter on or off:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Network and Internet Connections. The Network and Internet Connections window opens. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap Network Connections. The Network Connections window opens. 3 Right-click/Button-tap Wireless Network Connection, then click/tap Enable to turn on the wireless Ethernet emitter or click/tap Disable to turn off the wireless Ethernet emitter. www.gateway.com 221 Moving From Your Old Computer 12 If your new convertible tablet PC is replacing an old computer, you may have personal data files, Internet settings, a printer or other peripheral devices, and other unique computer settings that you want to move from your old computer to your new one. Read this chapter to learn about:

Using the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard Transferring Files Transferring Internet Settings Installing your old printer or scanner Installing your old programs 221 Chapter 12: Moving From Your Old Computer Using the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard You can move your data files and personal settings, such as display, Internet, and e-mail settings, from your old computer to your new one by using the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. The wizard also moves specific files or entire folders, such as My Documents, My Pictures, and Favorites. To open the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard:

Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, System Tools, then click/tap Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. Help and Support For more information about using the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword using transfer wizard in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Transferring files You can manually transfer your personal data files by copying them to removable media, such as a diskette, writable CD, USB flash drive, or Zip disk, or by using a home network. For more information, see Creating CDs using Nero Express on page 136 and Networking Your Gateway M275 on page 207. Finding your files Many programs automatically save your personal data files in the My Documents folder. Look in your old computers My Documents folder for personal data files. Use Windows Find or Search to locate other personal data files. For more information, see To find files using Find or Search: on page 224, or Searching for files on page 71. 222 www.gateway.com Transferring files To find files in the My Documents folder:

1 In Windows XP, click/tap Start, then click/tap My Documents. The My Documents window opens and displays many of your saved personal data files. Go to Step 4.

- OR -

In Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows 2000, double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop. Go to the next step. 2 Double-click/Double-tap the C:\ drive icon. 3 Double-click/Double-tap the My Documents folder. The My Documents window opens and displays many of your saved personal data files. 4 Copy your personal data files to removable media or to another computer on your network. You can often identify different data file types by looking at the files extension

(the part of the file name following the last period). For example, a document file might have a .DOC extension and a spreadsheet file might have an .XLS extension. File type File usually ends in... Documents

.DOC, .TXT, .RTF, .HTM, .HTML, .DOT Spreadsheets

.XLS, .XLT, .TXT Pictures Movies

.JPG, .BMP, .GIF, .PDF, .PCT, .TIF, .PNG, .EPS

.MPEG, .MPG, .AVI, .GIF, .MOV Sound and Music

.WAV, .CDA, .MP3, .MID, .MIDI, .WMA www.gateway.com 223 Chapter 12: Moving From Your Old Computer To find files using Find or Search:

1 In Windows XP, click/tap Start, then click/tap Search. The Search Results window opens.

- OR -

In Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows 2000, click Start, Find or Search, then click For Files or Folders. The Search Results window opens. 2 Use Windows Find or Search to locate data files by file name or file type. For help on finding files, click/tap Help, then click/tap Help and Support Center or Help Topics. For more information, see Searching for files on page 71. Help and Support For more information about finding files, click Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword searching for files in the Search box

, click/tap the arrow, then click/tap the Full-text Search Matches button. Transferring Internet settings You can use different methods to transfer your Internet account from your old computer to your new one. Setting up your ISP If your current Internet service provider (ISP) software came preinstalled on your new convertible tablet PC, run that setup program. If it asks to set up a new account or an existing one, choose to set up an existing account. If your current ISP software is not preinstalled on your new convertible tablet PC, locate the original Internet setup program provided by your local ISP, or contact your ISP to see if they have an updated version of their software, and install it on your new convertible tablet PC. If you use MSN as your ISP, or if you know your ISP settings, use the Windows Internet Connection Wizard. 224 www.gateway.com Installing your old printer or scanner To use the Internet Connection Wizard:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, Communications, then click/tap New Connection Wizard. The New Connection wizard opens. 2 Configure your Internet settings by following the on-screen instructions. Help and Support For more information about setting up an Internet connection, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword Internet connection in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Transferring your e-mail and address book See your old e-mail programs online help for information on exporting and importing e-mail messages and the address book. You can often export all of your old e-mail messages or address book to recordable media, then import them into your new convertible tablet PCs e-mail program. You may also want to consider printing the old information or using your old computer to send the e-mail messages to yourself, then using your new convertible tablet PC to retrieve the e-mail messages. Transferring your Internet shortcuts You can export and import your old Netscape Navigator bookmarks or Microsoft Internet Explorer favorites. For more information, see your Internet browser programs online help. Installing your old printer or scanner Windows may have built-in support for older printers, scanners, or other peripheral devices. This means you do not need any additional software. Newer devices, however, usually require your original software installation CDs or diskettes. www.gateway.com 225 Chapter 12: Moving From Your Old Computer If you have trouble after you install the software for your old devices, you can use System Restore to restore your convertible tablet PCs previous settings. Help and Support For information about restoring your convertible tablet PCs previous settings, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword System Restore in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Installing a USB printer or scanner USB devices may have special installation instructions. See your USB devices installation guide. Installing a parallel port printer You can usually install parallel port printers by following these steps. To install your old printer:

1 Shut down and turn off your convertible tablet PC. 2 Connect your parallel port printer. 3 Turn on your printer, then turn on your convertible tablet PC. 4 If Windows detects your printer, install your printer by following the on-screen instructions. You are finished.

- OR -

If Windows does not detect the printer, go to the next step. 5 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. 6 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Printers and Faxes icon, then click/tap Add a printer. The Add Printer wizard opens. 7 Install your printer by following the on-screen instructions. 226 www.gateway.com Installing your old programs Help and Support For more information about installing a printer, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword installing a printer in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. See your peripheral devices user guide for installation information and tips. Because most installation software is periodically updated, you should also check the manufacturers Web site for software updates. Installing your old programs You probably use some programs that did not come installed on your new convertible tablet PC, such as personal finance software, graphics programs, or games. Spend some time going through your old computers Start and Programs menus, making note of any programs you want to install on your new convertible tablet PC. Locate your original program installation CDs and installation guides. Your original CDs and guides should contain any serial numbers or product ID keys that may be required for program installation and registration. Remember to check the publishers Web site for important program updates. Tips & Tricks If your new convertible tablet PC comes with a newer version of a program, it is usually better to use the newer version than to reinstall the old one. If you have trouble after installing your old programs, you can restore your convertible tablet PCs previous settings using System Restore. Help and Support For more information about restoring your convertible tablet PCs previous settings, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword System Restore in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 227 Chapter 12: Moving From Your Old Computer 228 www.gateway.com 13 Maintaining Your Gateway M275 This chapter provides basic information about maintaining your convertible tablet PC hardware and software. Read this chapter to learn how to:

Care for your convertible tablet PC Protect your convertible tablet PC from viruses Manage hard drive space Back up files Clean your convertible tablet PC 229 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 Caring for your convertible tablet PC To extend the life of your convertible tablet PC:

Be careful not to bump or drop your convertible tablet PC, and do not put any objects on top of it. The case, although strong, is not made to support extra weight. When transporting your convertible tablet PC, we recommend that you put it in a carrying case. Keep diskettes, modular drives, and your convertible tablet PC away from magnetic fields. Magnetic fields can erase data on both diskettes and hard drives. Never turn off your convertible tablet PC when the hard drive light is on because data on the hard drive could be lost or corrupted. Avoid subjecting your convertible tablet PC to extreme temperature changes. The case and LCD panel can become brittle and easy to break in cold temperatures and can melt or warp in high temperatures. Damage due to either extreme is not covered by your warranty. As a general rule, your convertible tablet PC is safest at temperatures that are comfortable for you. Keep all liquids away from your convertible tablet PC. When spilled onto computer components, almost any liquid can result in extremely expensive repairs that are not covered under your warranty. Avoid dusty or dirty work environments. Dust and dirt can clog the internal mechanisms. Do not block the ventilation fan. When storing your convertible tablet PC for an extended period of time, unplug AC power and remove the battery after discharging it partway. Display screen Use only your convertible tablet PCs pen on the display. Do not write on the surface with an ink pen or pencil. Nothing heavier than your writing hand should be placed on top of the display. 230 www.gateway.com Caring for your convertible tablet PC Protect the display surface from unnecessary contact by turning the screen so it is in the notebook orientation and closing it when transporting the Gateway convertible tablet PC. For more information, see Converting the display from notebook to tablet mode on page 39. Never spray or pour liquids directly on the display surface. Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight. Use a soft fabric to wipe away dust and fingerprints. Dampen the cloth with water but never spray anything directly on the surface. If liquid collects around the edges, wipe it up immediately. Pen Always store the pen in the Gateway convertible tablet PCs pen holder when not in use. For more information, see Right Side on page 5. Store extra pens horizontally in a box or drawer. Pens should not be stored vertically on the tip because constant tip pressure can affect pen-screen interaction. The pen has electronics in it, so it should not be exposed to or immersed in liquids. Replacing the pen point Normal use wears down the pens point, so the pen ships with extra points and a replacement tool. To use the tool, grasp the old point with the ring and pull. Insert a new point and apply slight pressure to set it in place. www.gateway.com 231 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 Maintenance schedule Use the following table to set up a regular maintenance schedule. Maintenance task Check for viruses Manage hard drive space Clean up hard drives Scan hard drive for errors Defragment hard drive Back up files Recalibrate the battery Clean convertible tablet PC case Clean keyboard Clean convertible tablet PC screen Clean mouse Monthly When needed See... X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X page 233 page 236 page 237 page 238 page 240 page 242 page 170 page 244 page 245 page 245 page 245 232 www.gateway.com Protecting your convertible tablet PC from viruses Protecting your convertible tablet PC from viruses A virus is a program that attaches itself to a file on a computer, then spreads from one computer to another. Viruses can damage data or cause your convertible tablet PC to malfunction. Some viruses go undetected for a period of time because they are activated on a certain date. Protect your convertible tablet PC from a virus by:

Using the Norton AntiVirus program to check files and programs that are on diskettes, attached to e-mail messages, or downloaded from the Internet. Checking all programs for viruses before installing them. Disabling macros on suspicious Microsoft Word and Excel files. These programs will warn you if a document that you are opening contains a macro that might have a virus. Periodically updating the Norton AntiVirus program to protect against the latest viruses. Help and Support For more information about protecting your convertible tablet PC against viruses, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword viruses in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 233 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 To scan for viruses:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Norton AntiVirus, then click/tap Norton AntiVirus 2003. Norton AntiVirus opens. Scan for viruses 2 Click/Tap Scan for Viruses. Scan 3 Click/Tap the type of scan you want to make in the Scan for Viruses area, then under Actions, click/tap Scan. 234 www.gateway.com Protecting your convertible tablet PC from viruses To remove a virus:

1 If Norton AntiVirus finds a virus, follow all on-screen instructions to remove the virus. 2 Turn off your convertible tablet PC and leave it off for at least 30 seconds. 3 Turn on your convertible tablet PC and rescan for the virus. To update Norton AntiVirus:

1 Make sure that you are connected to the Internet. 2 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Norton AntiVirus, then click/tap LiveUpdate -

Norton AntiVirus. The LiveUpdate wizard opens. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to update your Norton AntiVirus program with the latest virus protection files. 4 When the program has finished, click/tap Finish. www.gateway.com 235 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 Managing hard drive space Windows provides several utilities you can use to manage your hard drive. Checking hard drive space To check hard drive space:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap My Computer. The My Computer window opens. 2 Right-click/Button-tap the drive that you want to check for available file space, then click/tap Properties. Drive space information appears. 236 www.gateway.com Managing hard drive space Using Disk Cleanup Delete unnecessary files, such as temporary Windows files, to free hard drive space. To use the Windows Disk Cleanup program:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap My Computer. The My Computer window opens. 2 Right-click/Button-tap the hard drive that you want to delete files from, for example Local Disk (C:), then click/tap Properties. The Properties dialog box opens at the General tab. 3 Click/Tap Disk Cleanup. The Disk Cleanup dialog box opens. 4 Make sure that the check box beside each file type you want to delete is selected. For more information about file types you can delete, read the descriptions in the Disk Cleanup dialog box. 5 Click/Tap OK, then click/tap Yes. www.gateway.com 237 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 Help and Support For more information about keeping the hard drive space free of unnecessary files, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword disk cleanup in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Checking the hard drive for errors The Error-checking program examines the hard drive for physical flaws and file and folder problems. This program corrects file and folder problems and marks flawed areas on the hard drive so Windows does not use them. If you use your convertible tablet PC several hours every day, you probably want to run Error-checking once a week. If you use your convertible tablet PC less frequently, once a month may be adequate. Also use Error-checking if you encounter hard drive problems. To check the hard drive for errors:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap My Computer. The My Computer window opens. 2 Right-click/Button-tap the hard drive that you want to check for errors, for example Local Disk (C:), then click/tap Properties. The Properties dialog box opens. 238 www.gateway.com 3 Click/Tap the Tools tab. Managing hard drive space 4 Click/Tap Check Now. 5 Click/Tap the options you want to use, then click/tap Start. For help, press F1. Windows checks the drive for errors. This process may take several minutes. After Windows has finished checking the drive for errors, it provides a summary of the problems that it found. 6 Correct any problems that are found by following the on-screen instructions. 7 Click/Tap OK. Help and Support For more information about checking the hard drive for errors, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword checking for disk errors in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 239 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 Defragmenting the hard drive When working with files, sometimes Windows divides the file information into pieces and stores them in different places on the hard drive. This is called fragmentation, and it is normal. In order for your convertible tablet PC to use a file, Windows must search for the pieces of the file and put them back together. This process slows the hard drive performance. The Disk Defragmenter program organizes the data on the drive so each file is stored as one unit rather than as multiple pieces scattered across different areas of the drive. Defragmenting the information stored on the drive can improve hard drive performance. While the Disk Defragmenter program is running, do not use your keyboard or mouse because using them may continuously stop and restart the defragmenting process. Also, if you are connected to a network, log off before starting Disk Defragmenter. Network communication may stop the defragmentation process and cause it to start over. To defragment the hard drive:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap My Computer. The My Computer window opens. 2 Right-click/Button-tap the hard drive that you want to defragment, for example Local Disk (C:), then click/tap Properties. The Properties dialog box opens. 240 www.gateway.com 3 Click/Tap the Tools tab. Managing hard drive space 4 Click/Tap Defragment Now. 5 If Disk Defragmenter does not start automatically, click/tap Defragment or Start. Disk Defragmenter shows its progress on the computer display. When finished, Disk Defragmenter asks if you want to quit the program. 6 Click/Tap Close or Yes, then click/tap the X in the top-right corner to close the Disk Defragmenter window. Help and Support For more information about defragmenting the hard drive, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword defragmenting in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 241 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 Backing up files Backing up files and removing them from the hard drive frees space for new files on the hard drive. It also protects you from losing important information if the hard drive fails or you accidentally delete files. You should back up your files regularly to a writable CD (if you have a recordable drive) or to diskettes (if you have a diskette drive). Use a backup device, such as a recordable drive or Zip drive, to do a complete hard drive backup. For more information, see Creating CDs using Nero Express on page 136. If you do not have a high-capacity backup device and you want to purchase one, you can contact Gateways Add-on Sales department or visit the Accessories Store at accessories.gateway.com. Help and Support For more information about backing up files, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword saving files in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Using the Scheduled Task Wizard The Scheduled Task Wizard lets you schedule maintenance tasks such as running Disk Defragmenter and Error-checking. 242 www.gateway.com Managing hard drive space To start the Scheduled Task Wizard:

1 Click/Tap Start, All Programs, Accessories, System Tools, then click/tap Scheduled Tasks. The Scheduled Tasks window opens. 2 Double-click/Double-tap the Add Scheduled Task icon. The Scheduled Task Wizard opens. 3 Click/Tap Next, then click/tap the task or program you want to schedule and follow the on-screen instructions to customize the task. Important Your convertible tablet PC must be on during scheduled tasks. If your convertible tablet PC is off, scheduled tasks will not run. Help and Support For more information about using the Scheduled Tasks Wizard, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword Scheduled Task Wizard in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 243 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 Cleaning your convertible tablet PC Keeping your convertible tablet PC clean and the vents free from dust helps keep your convertible tablet PC performing at its best. You may want to gather these items and put together a convertible tablet PC cleaning kit:

A soft, lint-free cloth An aerosol can of air that has a narrow, straw-like extension Isopropyl alcohol Cotton swabs A CD or DVD drive cleaning kit Cleaning the exterior Warning When you shut down your convertible tablet PC, the power turns off, but some electrical current still flows through your convertible tablet PC. To avoid possible injury from electrical shock, unplug the power cord and modem cable from the wall outlets. Always turn off your convertible tablet PC and other peripherals, then remove the main and optional secondary batteries before cleaning any components. Use a damp, lint-free cloth to clean your convertible tablet PC and other parts of your convertible tablet PC. Do not use abrasive or solvent cleaners because they can damage the finish on components. Your convertible tablet PC is cooled by air circulated through the vents on the case, so keep the vents free of dust. With your convertible tablet PC turned off and unplugged, brush the dust away from the vents with a damp cloth. Be careful not to drip any water into the vents. Do not attempt to clean dust from the inside of your convertible tablet PC. 244 www.gateway.com Cleaning your convertible tablet PC Cleaning the keyboard You should clean the keyboard occasionally by using an aerosol can of air with a narrow, straw-like extension to remove dust and lint trapped under the keys. If you spill liquid on the keyboard, turn off your convertible tablet PC and turn your convertible tablet PC upside down. Let the liquid drain, then let the keyboard dry before trying to use it again. If the keyboard does not work after it dries, you may need to replace it. Cleaning the convertible tablet PC screen Use a soft cloth and water to clean the convertible tablet PC screen. Squirt a little water on the cloth (never directly on the screen), and wipe the screen with the cloth. Warning The convertible tablet PC screen is made of specially coated glass and can be scratched or damaged by abrasive or ammonia-based glass cleaners. Cleaning the mouse If you have a mouse and the mouse pointer begins moving erratically across the computer screen or becomes difficult to control precisely, cleaning the mouse will likely improve its accuracy. Clean your optical mouse by wiping the bottom of the mouse with a damp lint-free cloth. www.gateway.com 245 Chapter 13: Maintaining Your Gateway M275 To clean your trackball mouse:

1 Turn the mouse upside down. 2 Rotate the retaining ring on the bottom of the mouse counter-clockwise, then remove the retaining ring and mouse ball. 3 Remove any dust, lint, or dirt from the mouse ball with a soft cloth. 4 Clean the mouse rollers with a cotton swab dipped in isopropyl alcohol. Mouse rollers 5 Replace the mouse ball and lock the retaining ring into place. 246 www.gateway.com Restoring Software 14 Read this chapter to learn how to:

Reinstall device drivers Update device drivers Reinstall programs Reinstall Windows If you are not comfortable with the procedures covered in this chapter, seek help from a more experienced computer user or a computer service technician. 247 Chapter 14: Restoring Software Using the Restoration CDs Use the Gateway Restoration CDs to reinstall device drivers, your operating system, and other programs that were preinstalled at the factory. Important Before you try to fix a problem by reinstalling software from your Gateway Restoration CDs, make sure that you have tried these steps first:

Use the diagnostics and troubleshooting tools found in Help and Support. For more information about diagnostics and troubleshooting tools, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword troubleshooting in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Run System Restore. For more information about System Restore, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword System Restore in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. See the Troubleshooting chapter of this guide. If these steps do not resolve the problem, use the Gateway Restoration CDs to reinstall device drivers or programs. If reinstalling device drivers or programs does not resolve the problem, reinstall Windows. 248 www.gateway.com Reinstalling device drivers Reinstalling device drivers Device drivers are programs that control devices such as the computer display, DVD drives, and modems. Drivers translate information between computer devices and programs. Drivers for your original convertible tablet PC hardware are installed at Gateway. If you install a new device, you need to install the drivers provided by the device manufacturer. You should reinstall device drivers:

If directed to do so while troubleshooting If you see a message indicating that there is a problem with a device driver If you need to reinstall device drivers because you are directed to do so while troubleshooting or if a message tells you that there is a problem with a device driver, reinstall the device drivers by following the instructions below. If you just reinstalled Windows XP, the device drivers were automatically reinstalled. To reinstall device drivers:

1 Insert the red Drivers and Applications CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. If the program starts automatically, go to Step 5.

- OR -

If the program does not start automatically, go to Step 2. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 2 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Run. The Run dialog box opens. 3 In the Open text box, type d:\runmenu.exe (where d is the drive letter of your DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive). 4 Click/Tap OK. www.gateway.com 249 Chapter 14: Restoring Software 5 If this is the first time you have inserted the red Drivers and Applications CD, accept the End User License Agreement (EULA) by clicking/tapping Yes, I accept it, then clicking/tapping Continue. The Gateway Driver and Application Recovery program starts and the Drivers and Application Recovery tab appears. 6 Select a single device driver to reinstall.

- OR -

Click/Tap Automatic Installation, then select multiple device drivers to reinstall. (Grayed out drivers are not available for Automatic Installation. To select these drivers, click/tap Manual Installation.) 7 Click/Tap Install. 8 Follow any additional on-screen instructions. Depending on the device driver you are reinstalling, you may only need to restart your convertible tablet PC to complete the installation. However, if a setup wizard opens when you restart your convertible tablet PC, follow the on-screen instructions. Help and Support For more information about reinstalling device drivers, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword drivers in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 250 www.gateway.com Updating device drivers Updating device drivers The Restoration CDs contain a device driver update utility that works over the Internet. If you do not have an Internet service provider, the update utility works by direct-dialing the device driver update service. Important If your convertible tablet PC came equipped with a wireless device, only use the drivers approved for the country the device will be used in. See the red Drivers and Applications CD or the Gateway Technical Support Web site (support.gateway.com). If your convertible tablet PC came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, see Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information on page 315 for general wireless regulatory and safety guidelines.To find out if your convertible tablet PC has an internal wireless device, check the label (see Identifying your model on page 10). To update device drivers:

1 Insert the red Drivers and Applications CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. If the program starts automatically, go to Step 5.

- OR -

If the program does not start automatically, go to Step 2. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 2 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Run. The Run dialog box opens. 3 In the Open text box, type d:\runmenu.exe (where d is the drive letter of the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive). 4 Click/Tap OK. www.gateway.com 251 Chapter 14: Restoring Software 5 If this is the first time you have inserted the red Drivers and Applications CD, accept the End User License Agreement (EULA) by clicking/tapping Yes, I accept it, then clicking/tapping Continue. The Gateway Driver and Application Recovery program starts and the Drivers and Application Recovery tab appears. 6 Click/Tap the Web Updates tab. 7 Click/Tap Check Now. The Connect window opens. 8 Install available updated device drivers by following the on-screen instructions. Depending on the device driver you are updating, you may only need to restart your convertible tablet PC to complete the installation. However, if a setup wizard opens when you restart your convertible tablet PC, follow the on-screen instructions. Help and Support For more information about updating device drivers, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword updating drivers in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Reinstalling programs If you have problems running a program or if you have reinstalled your operating system, you can reinstall programs from the red Drivers and Applications CD and other program CDs. If you are reinstalling programs from other program CDs, follow the installation instructions on each CD. If you want to reinstall a program, uninstall the old version first. To reinstall programs from the Drivers and Applications CD:

1 If you just reinstalled Windows, go to Step 4. Otherwise, go to the next step. 2 Click/Tap Start, Control Panel, then click/tap Add or Remove Programs. 3 In the Currently Installed Programs list, click/tap the program you want to uninstall, then click/tap Change/Remove and follow the on-screen instructions. 252 www.gateway.com Reinstalling programs 4 Insert the red Drivers and Applications CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. If the program starts automatically, go to Step 8.

- OR -

If the program does not start automatically, go to Step 5. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 5 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Run. The Run dialog box opens. 6 In the Open text box, type d:\runmenu.exe (where d is the drive letter of your DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive). 7 Click/Tap OK. 8 If this is the first time you have inserted the red Drivers and Applications CD, accept the End User License Agreement (EULA) by clicking/tapping Yes, I accept it, then clicking/tapping Continue. The Gateway Driver and Application Recovery program starts and the Drivers and Application Recovery tab appears. 9 Select a single program to reinstall.

- OR -

Click/Tap Automatic Installation, then select multiple programs to reinstall.

(Grayed out programs are not available for Automatic Installation. To select these programs, click/tap Manual Installation.) 10 Click/Tap Install. 11 Follow any additional on-screen instructions. Depending on the programs you are reinstalling, you may only need to restart your convertible tablet PC to complete the installation. However, if a setup wizard opens when you restart your convertible tablet PC, follow the on-screen instructions. www.gateway.com 253 Chapter 14: Restoring Software Help and Support For more information about reinstalling programs, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword installing programs in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. To reinstall other programs from a CD:

1 If you just reinstalled Windows, go to Step 4. Otherwise, go to the next step. 2 Click/Tap Start, Control Panel, then click/tap Add or Remove Programs. 3 In the Currently Installed Programs list, click/tap the program you want to uninstall, then click/tap Change/Remove and follow the on-screen instructions. 4 Insert the program CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 5 Complete the program reinstallation by following the instructions included with the program CD. Reinstalling Windows If your convertible tablet PC is not working correctly, try the following options to correct the problem:

Troubleshooting. For more information, see Troubleshooting on page 285. Running System Restore. Reinstalling device drivers. For more information, see Reinstalling device drivers on page 249. 254 www.gateway.com Reinstalling Windows If the options above do not correct the problem, you can use the Restoration CDs to reinstall Windows and other software. The Restoration CDs step you through reinstalling Windows XP. If you are reinstalling Windows XP, the Restoration CDs automatically reinstall the hardware device drivers and some programs as well. You can install any remaining programs by using the program CDs that came with your convertible tablet PC. To reinstall your programs, follow the instructions in Reinstalling programs on page 252. Important If you are prompted for your Windows product key when you reinstall Windows, you can find the key on the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label located on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC case. For more information, see Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity on page 11. To reinstall Windows XP and the device drivers:

Caution Back up your personal files before you use this option. All files on your convertible tablet PC will be deleted!

1 Insert the red Drivers and Applications CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. Important If the drive you want to use is not in the modular bay, you need to swap modules. For more information about swapping modules, see Changing modules on page 110. 2 Restart your convertible tablet PC. 3 Select 2. Boot from CD-ROM. 4 Select a language option. 5 Select 1. Delete all files (Automated Fdisk/Format). 6 Select 1. Continue deleting all files and restart. 7 When prompted, press any key to continue. www.gateway.com 255 Chapter 14: Restoring Software 8 Select 2. Boot from CD-ROM. 9 Select a language option. 10 Select 2. Automated installation of Windows (XP). 11 When prompted, remove the red Drivers and Applications CD and insert the blue Operating System CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive, then press any key to continue. 12 When prompted, accept the License Agreement by pressing Y. 13 Wait while the setup program copies files to your hard drive. When your convertible tablet PC restarts, do NOT press any key to boot from CD. 14 When prompted, insert the red Drivers and Applications CD, then click/tap Continue. The Gateway Application Loader automatically installs your drivers and programs. Your convertible tablet PC restarts several times during this process. Do not press any keys or buttons during this process unless prompted to do so. 15 When the Gateway Application Loader has finished, go to the Windows desktop by clicking/tapping OK. 16 Install additional programs by following the instructions in Reinstalling programs on page 252. 17 Install other software, such as Microsoft Works Suite and gaming software, by following the instructions in To reinstall other programs from a CD:

on page 254. 256 www.gateway.com 15 Upgrading Your Gateway M275 This chapter provides information about adding hardware devices to your convertible tablet PC. Read this chapter to learn how to:

Add and remove PC Cards Add and replace memory Replace the hard drive 257 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 Adding and removing a PC Card Your convertible tablet PC has a PC Card slot (also known as a PCMCIA card slot). This slot accepts one Type II card. You do not need to restart your convertible tablet PC when changing most cards because your convertible tablet PC supports hot-swapping. Hot-swapping means that you can insert a PC Card while your convertible tablet PC is running. If your PC Card does not work after hot-swapping, see the PC Card manufacturers documentation for further information. To insert a PC Card:

Push the card firmly into the PC Card slot label-side up until the outer edge of the card is flush with the side of your convertible tablet PC. 258 www.gateway.com To remove a PC Card:

1 Click/Tap the remove hardware then click/tap Stop.

-OR-

Adding and removing a PC Card icon in the taskbar, the PC Card name, Turn off your convertible tablet PC. Important If the remove hardware icon does not appear on the taskbar, click/tap the show hidden icons button. 2 Press the PC Card eject button once to release the eject button. 3 Press the PC Card eject button again to eject the PC Card. www.gateway.com 259 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 Preventing static electricity discharge The components inside your convertible tablet PC are extremely sensitive to static electricity, also known as electrostatic discharge (ESD). Warning Warning ESD can permanently damage electrostatic discharge-sensitive components in your convertible tablet PC. Prevent ESD damage by following ESD guidelines every time you install memory or replace the hard drive. To avoid exposure to dangerous electrical voltages and moving parts, turn off your convertible tablet PC and unplug the power cord and modem and network cables before opening the case. Before installing memory or replacing the hard drive, follow these guidelines:

Turn off your convertible tablet PC. Wear a grounding wrist strap (available at most electronics stores) and attach it to a bare metal part of your workbench or other grounded connection. Warning To prevent risk of electric shock, do not insert any object into the vent holes of your convertible tablet PC. Touch a bare metal surface on your workbench or other grounded object. Unplug the power cord and the modem and network cables. Remove the main battery (and secondary battery, if installed). For more information, see Changing batteries on page 171. Disconnect all peripheral devices and remove any PC Cards. 260 www.gateway.com Adding or replacing memory Before working with computer components, follow these guidelines:

Avoid static-causing surfaces such as carpeted floors, plastic, and packing foam. Remove components from their antistatic bags only when you are ready to use them. Do not lay components on the outside of antistatic bags because only the inside of the bags provide electrostatic protection. Always hold components by their edges. Avoid touching the edge connectors. Never slide components over any surface. Adding or replacing memory Your convertible tablet PC uses memory modules called SO-DIMMs (Small Outline Dual Inline Memory Modules). The modules are available in various capacities and any module can be placed in the memory bay. Use only memory modules designed for the Gateway M275 for upgrading your memory. SO-DIMMs are located in two places inside your convertible tablet PC. Both SO-DIMMs can be upgraded. For instructions on upgrading the SO-DIMM located on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC, see Adding or replacing memory in the memory bay on page 262. For instructions on upgrading the SO-DIMM located under the keyboard of your convertible tablet PC, see Replacing memory under the keyboard on page 265. www.gateway.com 261 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 Adding or replacing memory in the memory bay Important Use only memory modules designed for the Gateway M275. Memory bay To add or replace memory modules:

1 Follow the instructions under Preventing static electricity discharge on page 260. 2 Turn off your convertible tablet PC, disconnect the AC adapter and modem and network cables. 3 Disconnect your convertible tablet PC from the optional port replicator

(see Disconnecting from the port replicator on page 283). 4 Turn your convertible tablet PC over so the bottom is facing up. 262 www.gateway.com Adding or replacing memory 5 Remove the main and optional secondary batteries. For more information, see Changing batteries on page 171. 6 Loosen the two memory bay cover screws, then remove the memory bay cover. Screws 7 If you are removing a module, gently press outward on the clip at each end of the memory module until the module tilts upward. www.gateway.com 263 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 8 Pull the memory module out of the slot. 9 Hold the new or replacement module at a 30-degree angle and press it into the empty memory slot. This module is keyed so it can only be inserted in one direction. If the module does not fit, make sure that the notch in the module lines up with the tab in the memory bay. Important Use only memory modules designed for the Gateway M275. 10 Gently push the module down until it clicks in place. 11 Replace the memory bay cover and tighten the cover screws. 12 Insert the batteries, then turn your convertible tablet PC over. 13 Reattach the optional port replicator. 14 Connect the power adapter and modem and network cables, then turn on your convertible tablet PC. 264 www.gateway.com Adding or replacing memory Replacing memory under the keyboard Important Use only memory modules designed for the Gateway M275 for upgrading your memory. Installing replacement memory under the keyboard is a process consisting of three procedures that must be done in sequence:

1 Open the keyboard compartment. 2 Replace the memory. 3 Reattach the keyboard. Opening the keyboard compartment To open the keyboard compartment:

1 Follow the instructions under Preventing static electricity discharge on page 260. 2 Turn off your convertible tablet PC, disconnect the AC adapter and modem and network cables. 3 Turn your convertible tablet PC over so the bottom is facing up. 4 Remove the main and optional secondary batteries. For more information, see Changing batteries on page 171. www.gateway.com 265 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 5 Remove the two keyboard screws. Screw Screw 6 Turn your convertible tablet PC over so the top is facing up. 7 Open the LCD panel to the normal viewing position. 266 www.gateway.com Adding or replacing memory 8 Insert the small flat-blade screwdriver under the bottom of the keyboard bezel between the F11 and F12 keys and gently pry it up. Important Inserting a piece of cloth between the screwdriver and keyboard will help prevent damage to your convertible tablet PC. 9 Remove the bezel from your convertible tablet PC by pulling the bezel toward you and at the same time lifting its front to clear the keyboard. You will hear small snapping sounds as the bezel comes away from your convertible tablet PC. Be careful not to break off the tabs found on the bottom of the bezel. www.gateway.com 267 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 10 With a small Phillips screwdriver, remove the four keyboard screws and put them in a safe place. Screws 268 www.gateway.com 11 Lift the back edge of the keyboard, then slowly rotate it toward you so it lies keys-down on top of your convertible tablet PC. Be careful not to damage the LCD panel. Adding or replacing memory www.gateway.com 269 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 Replacing the memory To replace the memory:

1 Gently press outward on the clip at each end of the memory module until the module tilts upward. 2 Pull the memory module out of the slot. 270 www.gateway.com Adding or replacing memory 3 Hold the new or replacement module at a 30-degree angle and press it into the empty memory slot. This module is keyed so it can only be inserted in one direction. If the module does not fit, make sure that the notch in the module lines up with the tab in the memory bay. Important Use only memory modules designed for the Gateway M275. 4 Gently push the module down until it clicks in place. Reattaching the keyboard To reattach the keyboard:

1 Rotate the keyboard toward the LCD panel until the keyboard is almost face-up. 2 Insert the tabs on the front of the keyboard under the palm rest. Tabs www.gateway.com 271 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 3 Gently press the keyboard down until it is flat all the way across. The keyboard should easily fall into place. Be careful not to damage the LCD panel. 4 Replace the four keyboard screws. Screws 5 Slide the tabs on the bottom side of the bezel under your convertible tablet PC frame. 6 Press down on the bezel in several places to make sure it is correctly mounted. The bezel is correctly mounted when you can run you finger along the bezel and find no loose spots. The bezel should be flat all the way across. 272 www.gateway.com Replacing the hard drive kit Warning If the bezel is not correctly replaced, your convertible tablet PC could be damaged when you try to close the LCD panel. 7 Turn your convertible tablet PC over so the bottom is facing up. 8 Replace the two keyboard screws. 9 Insert the batteries, then turn your convertible tablet PC over. 10 Connect the power adapter and modem and network cables, then turn on your convertible tablet PC. Replacing the hard drive kit If you would like more hard drive capacity, you can replace your original drive with a higher-capacity drive. Hard drive www.gateway.com 273 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 To replace the hard drive kit:

1 Follow the instructions under Preventing static electricity discharge on page 260. 2 Turn off your convertible tablet PC, disconnect the AC adapter and modem and network cables. 3 Disconnect your convertible tablet PC from the optional port replicator

(see Disconnecting from the port replicator on page 283). 4 Turn your convertible tablet PC over so the bottom is facing up. 5 Remove the main and optional secondary batteries. For more information, see Changing batteries on page 171. 6 Remove the two hard drive kit screws. Screws Tips & Tricks Use a magnetic screwdriver or turn your convertible tablet PC over to remove the screws. 274 www.gateway.com 7 Slide the old hard drive kit out of your convertible tablet PC. Replacing the hard drive kit 8 If your new hard drive already includes the hard drive kit bracket, go to Step 13.

-OR-

If you need to move the hard drive kit bracket from your old hard drive kit to your new hard drive, go to Step 9. 9 Remove the two screws that secure the hard drive to the hard drive kit bracket. Screw Screw www.gateway.com 275 Chapter 15: Upgrading Your Gateway M275 10 Remove the bracket from the old drive. 11 Insert the new drive into the bracket so the screw holes line up. 12 Replace the two screws that secure the bracket to the drive. 13 Place the new hard drive kit into the bay and slide it into the connector. 14 Replace the screws that secure the hard drive kit to your convertible tablet PC. 15 Insert the batteries, then turn your convertible tablet PC over. 16 Reattach the optional port replicator. 17 Connect the power adapter and modem and network cables, then turn on your convertible tablet PC. 276 www.gateway.com Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator 16 The optional port replicator gives you a convenient way to attach external devices such as a monitor, a full-size keyboard, or an AC adapter. Although devices can be attached directly to the ports on your convertible tablet PC, the port replicator lets you make all of those connections in one step. The port replicator also gives you access to additional ports not found on your convertible tablet PC. Read this chapter to learn:

Where ports and jacks are located How to connect and disconnect the port replicator How to secure the port replicator with a locking cable 277 Chapter 16: Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator Front Kensington lock ring Docking port Docking release latch Component Icon Description Kensington lock ring Docking port Docking release latch Secure your convertible tablet PC and port replicator to an object by connecting a Kensington cable lock through this ring and into the Kensington lock slot on your convertible tablet PC. For more information, see Securing your port replicator on page 284. Connect your convertible tablet PC to this port. Warning! Power is passed through this port. This docking connection is certified to UL 1950 for use only with convertible tablet PCs designed for your Gateway port replicator. Press the release latch to attach the convertible tablet PC. Lift the release latch to release your convertible tablet PC. 278 www.gateway.com Left side Left side Component USB port USB port Icon Description Plug USB (Universal Serial Bus) devices (such as a diskette drive, flash drive, Iomega Zip drive, printer, scanner, camera, keyboard, or mouse) into this port. www.gateway.com 279

Chapter 16: Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator Back S/PDIF digital audio jack S-Video out jack USB ports Power connector Microphone jack Headphone jack Line in jack Parallel port Serial port Monitor port Ethernet jack PS/2 mouse port PS/2 keyboard port Component Icon Description S/PDIF digital audio jack S-Video out jack USB ports Power connector Microphone jack Headphone jack Plug an optical (Toslink) AC-3 digital audio cable into this jack. Plug a standard S-Video cable into this jack and the jack on an S-Video device (such as a television or VCR). For more information, see Viewing the display on a television on page 162. Plug USB (Universal Serial Bus) devices (such as a USB Iomega Zip drive, printer, scanner, camera, keyboard, or mouse) into these ports. Plug the AC adapter cable into this connector. Plug a microphone into this jack. Plug amplified speakers or headphones into this jack. The built-in speakers on your convertible tablet PC are turned off when speakers or headphones are plugged into this jack. This jack is turned off when headphones are plugged into your convertible tablet PCs headphone jack. 280 www.gateway.com Component Line in jack Parallel port Serial port Monitor port Ethernet jack PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 mouse port Icon Description Back Connect an external audio input source (such as a stereo) to this jack so that you can record sound on your convertible tablet PC or play sound through your convertible tablet PC speakers. Plug a parallel device (such as a printer) into this port. Plug a serial device (such as a digital camera) into this port. Plug an analog VGA monitor into this port. Plug a 10/100 Ethernet network cable into this jack. For more information, see Connecting to a wired Ethernet network on page 48 and Networking Your Gateway M275 on page 207. Plug a Personal System/2 (PS/2) keyboard into this port. Attaching a PS/2 keyboard to your port replicator may deactivate the built-in keyboard. Plug a Personal System/2 (PS/2) mouse into this port. Attaching a PS/2 mouse to your port replicator may deactivate the touchpad. www.gateway.com 281 Chapter 16: Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator Connecting to the port replicator You can attach your convertible tablet PC to the port replicator while your convertible tablet PC is off, on, or in Standby mode. Attaching to the port replicator To attach your convertible tablet PC to the port replicator:

1 Connect external devices to the ports on the port replicator. 2 Make sure the docking release latch is in the raised position. 3 Align the connector holes on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC with the docking posts on the port replicator. 4 Press down on the docking release latch until your convertible tablet PC moves into place. Important Your convertible tablet PC may detect additional devices and add drivers after being attached to the port replicator. This process must be completed for components to work correctly. Follow any on-screen instructions, if necessary. 282 www.gateway.com Connecting to the port replicator Disconnecting from the port replicator You can separate your convertible tablet PC from the port replicator while your convertible tablet PC is off or on (not in Standby or Hibernate mode). To separate your convertible tablet PC from the port replicator:

1 If your convertible tablet PC is off, go to Step 2.

-OR-

Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Undock Computer. The Undock Computer menu item appears in the Start menu only while your convertible tablet PC is docked. 2 Pull up on the docking release latch. Your convertible tablet PC will move out and away from the port replicator. 3 Lift your convertible tablet PC off of the port replicator. www.gateway.com 283 Chapter 16: Using the Gateway M275 Port Replicator Securing your port replicator You can secure your convertible tablet PC and port replicator to an object by using the security ring located on the left side of the port replicator and the Kensington lock slot located on the left side of your convertible tablet PC. To secure your convertible tablet PC and port replicator:

1 Open the security ring on the port replicator. 2 Attach your convertible tablet PC to the port replicator. 3 Secure one end of the Kensington cable to a solid object, then run the other end of the cable through the security ring and lock it into the slot provided on the left side of your convertible tablet PC. 284 www.gateway.com 17 Troubleshooting This chapter provides some solutions to common convertible tablet PC problems. Read this chapter to learn how to:

Troubleshoot typical hardware and software problems Get telephone support Use automated troubleshooting systems Get tutoring and training If the suggestions in this chapter do not correct the problem, see Getting Help on page 51 for more information about how to get help. 285 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Safety guidelines While troubleshooting your convertible tablet PC, follow these safety guidelines:

Never remove the memory bay cover, keyboard, or hard drive kit if your convertible tablet PC is turned on, the batteries are installed, or while the modem cable, network cable, or AC power adapter are connected to your convertible tablet PC. Make sure that you are correctly grounded before accessing internal components. For more information about preventing damage from static electricity, see Preventing static electricity discharge on page 260. After you complete any maintenance tasks where you remove the memory bay cover, keyboard, or hard drive kit, make sure that you replace the cover, keyboard, or hard drive kit, reinstall any screws, then replace the batteries before you start your convertible tablet PC. Warning Do not try to troubleshoot your problem if power cords or plugs are damaged, if your convertible tablet PC was dropped, or if the case was damaged. Instead, unplug your convertible tablet PC and contact a qualified computer technician. 286 www.gateway.com First steps First steps If you have problems with your convertible tablet PC, try these things first:

Make sure that the AC power adapter is connected to your convertible tablet PC and an AC outlet and that the AC outlet is supplying power. If you use a power strip or surge protector, make sure that it is turned on. If a peripheral device (such as a keyboard or mouse) does not work, make sure that all connections are secure. Make sure that your hard drive is not full. If an error message appears on the screen, write down the exact message. The message may help Gateway Technical Support in diagnosing and fixing the problem. If you added or removed peripheral devices, review the installation procedures you performed and make sure that you followed each instruction. If an error occurs in a program, see the programs printed documentation or the online help. Help and Support For more information about troubleshooting, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword troubleshooting in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Software support tools Your convertible tablet PC may include the following support tool to help you diagnose and fix problems:

PC Doctor is a comprehensive hardware diagnostic and system information tool that can test your convertible tablet PC and determine its configuration. PC Doctor provides 85 professional diagnostic tests directly from your convertible tablet PC. This support tool is available by clicking/tapping Start, All Programs, then clicking/tapping Gateway Utilities. www.gateway.com 287 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Audio See Sound on page 308. Battery See Power on page 305. Device installation You have computer problems after adding a new device Sometimes a new device, such as a PC Card, can cause a system resource (IRQ) conflict. Check IRQ usage to determine if there is an IRQ conflict. To check IRQ usage:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Performance and Maintenance. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap System, click/tap the Hardware tab, then click/tap Device Manager. The Device Manager window opens. 3 Click/Tap View, then click/tap Resources by type. Double-click/Double-tap Interrupt request (IRQ). All IRQs and their hardware assignments are displayed. Help and Support For more information about IRQs, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword IRQs in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. 288 www.gateway.com Troubleshooting To free IRQ resources for the new device:

1 In the Device Manager window, check the device list for a resource conflict. A resource conflict appears as a black exclamation point in a yellow circle. 2 Remove the device you are trying to install, then determine which one of the existing devices or ports you can disable. 3 Right-click/Button-tap the device or port you want to disable, then click/tap Disable. The device or port is disabled. Diskette drive (external) The diskette drive is not recognized Shut down and restart your convertible tablet PC. The USB cable may not be inserted completely into the USB port. Press the cable into the port, then try to access the diskette again. You see an Access Denied or Write protect error message Move the write-protection tab in the upper-right corner of the diskette down (unprotected). The diskette may be full. Delete unnecessary files on the diskette and try again. Not all diskettes are IBM-compatible. Make sure that the diskette you are using is IBM-compatible. Try a different diskette. Occasionally diskettes are flawed and cannot be read by the diskette drive. You see a Disk is full error message Delete unnecessary files on the diskette. Try a different diskette. Occasionally diskettes are flawed and cannot be read by the diskette drive. Run Error checking on the diskette. For more information, see Checking the hard drive for errors on page 238. If errors are detected and corrected, try using the diskette again. www.gateway.com 289 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting You see a Non-system disk, NTLDR is missing, or Disk error error message Eject the diskette from the diskette drive, then press ENTER. Make sure that the diskette you are using is IBM-compatible. The diskette drive status indicator is lit continuously Remove the diskette from the drive. If the indicator stays on, try restarting your convertible tablet PC. Display The screen is too dark Adjust the brightness using the system keys. For more information, see System key combinations on page 30. The screen resolution is not correct Change the screen resolution from the Display Properties dialog box. For more information, see Adjusting the screen resolution on page 195. Help and Support For more information about changing the screen resolution, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword screen resolution in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. The text on the display is dim or difficult to read Adjust the brightness and contrast using the system keys. For more information, see System key combinations on page 30. Change the display settings. For more information, see Adjusting the screen and desktop settings on page 193. Move your convertible tablet PC away from sources of electrical interference, such as televisions, unshielded speakers, microwaves, fluorescent lights, and metal beams or shelves. 290 www.gateway.com Troubleshooting The display has pixels that are always dark or too bright This condition is normal and inherent in the TFT technology used in active-matrix LCD screens. Gateways inspection standards keep these to a minimum. If you feel these pixels are unacceptably numerous or dense on your display, contact Gateway Technical Support to identify whether a repair or replacement is justified based on the number of pixels affected. DVD or DVD/CD-RW drives Your convertible tablet PC does not recognize a disc The disc may not be seated correctly in the tray. When you place a disc on the tray, make sure that you press the disc firmly onto the spindle so the retainers hold the disc in place. The modular drive may not be inserted completely into the modular bay. Press the module into the bay, then try to access the disc again. Make sure that the disc label is facing up, then try again. Try a different disc. Occasionally discs are flawed and cannot be read by the drive. Some music CDs have copy protection software. You may not be able to play these CDs on your convertible tablet PC. Your convertible tablet PC may be experiencing some temporary memory problems. Shut down and restart your convertible tablet PC. Clean the disc. For more information, see Cleaning CDs or DVDs on page 293. An audio CD does not produce sound Make sure that the CD label is facing up, then try again. Some music CDs have copy protection software. You may not be able to play these CDs on your convertible tablet PC. Make sure that the volume control on your convertible tablet PC is turned up. For more information, see System key combinations on page 30. Make sure that the Windows volume control is turned up. For more information, see Adjusting the volume on page 102. Make sure that Mute controls are turned off. For more information about the mute setting, see System key combinations on page 30 or Adjusting the volume on page 102. www.gateway.com 291 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Make sure that headphones are not plugged into the headphone jack. For the location of the headphone jack, see Left Side on page 3 and Back on page 280. If you are using powered speakers, make sure that they are plugged in and turned on. Clean the CD. For more information, see Cleaning CDs or DVDs on page 293. Your convertible tablet PC may be experiencing some temporary memory problems. Shut down and restart your convertible tablet PC. Reinstall the audio device drivers. For more information, see Reinstalling device drivers on page 249. A DVD movie will not play Make sure that the label or side you want to play is facing up, then try again. Shut down and restart your convertible tablet PC. Clean the DVD. For more information, see Cleaning CDs or DVDs on page 293. DVD discs and drives contain regional codes that help control DVD title exports and help reduce illegal disc distribution. To be able to play a DVD, the discs regional code and your DVD drives regional code must match. The regional code on your DVD drive is determined by your convertible tablet PCs delivery address. The regional code for the United States and Canada is 1. The regional code for Mexico is 4. Your DVD drives regional code must match the regional code of the disc. The regional code for the disc is on the disc, disc documentation, or packaging. If the DVD movie does not play, the discs regional code and your DVD drives regional code may not match. Make sure that the InterVideo program has been installed on your convertible tablet PC. See Playing a DVD on page 124 for more information. A DVD does not produce sound on a TV Audio is not transmitted through the S-Video out jack. Use the built-in speakers, a set of headphones or external powered speakers, or connect your convertible tablet PC to a stereo system to hear sound while playing a DVD. 292 www.gateway.com Cleaning CDs or DVDs Wipe from the center to the edge, not around in a circle, using a product made especially for the purpose. Troubleshooting File management A file was accidentally deleted If a file was deleted at a DOS prompt or in Windows while holding down the SHIFT key, the file cannot be restored. To restore deleted files:

1 Double-click/Double-tap the Recycle Bin icon. 2 Right-click/Button-tap the file you want to restore, then click/tap Restore. The file is restored to the place where it was originally deleted from. If the Recycle Bin was emptied before you tried to restore a file, the file cannot be restored. Help and Support For more information about restoring deleted files, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword System Restore in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. www.gateway.com 293 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Hard drive You see an Insufficient disk space error message Delete unnecessary files from the hard drive using Disk Cleanup. For more information, see Using Disk Cleanup on page 237. Empty the Recycle Bin by right-clicking/button-tapping the Recycle Bin icon, then clicking/tapping Empty Recycle Bin. Caution All deleted files will be lost when you empty the Recycle Bin. Save your files to a diskette or another drive. If the hard drive is full, copy any files not regularly used to diskettes or other backup media, then delete them from the hard drive. Help and Support For more information about file management, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword file management in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. You see a Data error message This may be the result of a defective area on the hard drive. To fix hard drive problems, run the Error checking program. For more information, see Checking the hard drive for errors on page 238. The hard drive cannot be accessed, or you see a General failure reading drive C error message If a diskette is in the diskette drive, eject it and restart your convertible tablet PC. Make sure that the hard drive is installed correctly. Remove it, firmly reinsert it, then restart your convertible tablet PC. For more information, see Replacing the hard drive kit on page 273. If your convertible tablet PC has been subjected to static electricity or physical shock, you may need to reinstall the operating system. 294 www.gateway.com Troubleshooting You see a Non-system disk, NTLDR is missing, or disk error message Eject the diskette from the diskette drive, then press ENTER. Interface/Ports The buttons on the convertible tablet PCs LCD panel do not do what they are supposed to The button functions have been changed. Reset button functions in the Buttons tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings dialog box. For more information, see Programming the buttons on page 201. The convertible tablet PC does not recognize the PC Card The card is incorrectly inserted. Eject the card and re-insert it with the label side up. For more information, see Adding and removing a PC Card on page 258. The convertible tablet PC does not recognize a USB or 1394 peripheral device The peripheral device is not connected to the convertible tablet PC correctly. Check the connection cable, and be sure it is inserted in the correct port on the convertible tablet PC and the peripheral device. The correct driver is not built into Windows XP. Use the devices installation CD or check the manufacturers Web site for the correct driver. Internet You cannot connect to the Internet Make sure that the modem cable is plugged into the modem jack and not the Ethernet network jack. See Right Side on page 5 to make sure that the connections have been made correctly. Make sure that your convertible tablet PC is connected to the telephone line and the telephone line has a dial tone. If you have the call waiting feature on your telephone line, make sure that it is disabled. Make sure that you are not using a digital, rollover, or PBX line. These lines do not work with your modem. www.gateway.com 295 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Make sure that your account with your Internet service provider (ISP) is set up correctly. Contact your ISP technical support for help. Make sure that you do not have a problem with your modem. For more information, see Modem (dial-up) on page 298 Help and Support For more information about troubleshooting Internet connections, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword troubleshooting connections in the Search box arrow.

, then click/tap the You see an Unable to locate host message and are unable to browse the Internet This problem can occur when you have typed a URL (Web address) incorrectly, you have lost your Internet connection, or your ISP is having technical difficulties. Double-check the URL or try a different URL. If the error message still appears, disconnect from the ISP connection and close your browser, then reconnect and open the browser. If you still get the error, your ISP may be having technical difficulties. Connecting to a Web site takes too long Many factors can affect Internet performance:

The condition of the telephone lines in your residence or at your local telephone service The condition of the Internet computers to which you connect and the number of users accessing those computers The complexity of graphics and multimedia on Web pages Having multiple Web browsers open, performing multiple downloads, and having multiple programs open on your convertible tablet PC People are sending you e-mail messages, but you have not received any mail Click/Tap the receive button in your e-mail program. Make sure that your account with your Internet service provider (ISP) is set up correctly. Contact your ISP for technical support. 296 www.gateway.com Troubleshooting Keyboard The built-in keyboard does not work Attaching a PS/2 keyboard to your port replicator while your convertible tablet PC is running may deactivate the built-in keyboard. The external keyboard does not work Make sure that the keyboard cable is plugged in correctly. Remove all extension cables and switchboxes. Clean the keyboard by using an aerosol can of air with a narrow, straw-like extension to remove dust and lint trapped under the keys. Try a keyboard that you know works to make sure that the keyboard port works. If you spilled liquid in the keyboard, turn off your convertible tablet PC and unplug the keyboard. Clean the keyboard and turn it upside down to drain it. Let the keyboard dry before using it again. If the keyboard does not work after it dries, you may need to replace it. A keyboard character keeps repeating or you see a Keyboard stuck or Key failure error message Make sure that nothing is resting on the keyboard. Make sure that a key is not stuck. Press each key to loosen a key that might be stuck, then restart your convertible tablet PC. Memory You see a Memory error message Make sure that the memory modules are inserted correctly in the memory bay slots. For more information, see Adding or replacing memory on page 261. Use PC Doctor or a third-party diagnostic program to help determine if a memory module is failing. For more information, see Adding or replacing memory on page 261. You see a Not enough memory error message Close all programs, then restart your convertible tablet PC. www.gateway.com 297 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Help and Support For more information about troubleshooting memory errors, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword memory error in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Memory card reader Drive letter for the memory card slot does not appear in the My Computer window Reboot your convertible tablet PC. Modem (dial-up) Your modem does not dial or does not connect Make sure that the modem cable is plugged into the modem jack and not the Ethernet network jack. See Right Side on page 5 to make sure that the connections have been made correctly. Make sure that your convertible tablet PC is connected to the telephone line and the telephone line has a dial tone. Make sure that the modem cable is less than 6 feet (1.8 meters) long. Remove any line splitters or surge protectors from your telephone line, then check for a dial tone by plugging a working telephone into the telephone wall jack. If you have additional telephone services such as call waiting, call messaging, or voice mail, make sure that all messages are cleared and call waiting is disabled before using the modem. Contact your telephone service to get the correct code to temporarily disable the service. Also make sure that the modem dialing properties are set appropriately. To check the dialing properties:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Phone and Modem Options icon, then click/tap the Dialing Rules tab. 298 www.gateway.com 3 Click/Tap the location from which you are dialing, then click/tap Edit. 4 Make sure that all settings are correct. Troubleshooting Help and Support For more information about dialing properties, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword dialing in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Disconnect any answering machine, fax machine, or printer that is on the same line as the modem. Do not connect these devices to the same telephone line as the modem. Make sure that you are not using a digital, rollover, or PBX line. These lines do not work with your modem. Check for line noise (scratchy, crackling, or popping sounds). Line noise is a common problem that can cause the modem to connect at a slower rate, abort downloads, or even disconnect. The faster the modem, the less line noise it can tolerate and still work correctly. Listen to the line using your telephone. Dial a single number (such as 1). When the dial tone stops, listen for line noise. Wiggle the modem cable to see if that makes a difference. Make sure that the connectors are free from corrosion and all screws in the wall or telephone wall jack are secure. You can also call your telephone service and have the telephone line checked for noise or low line levels. Try another telephone line (either a different telephone number in your house or a telephone line at a different location). If you can connect on this line, call your telephone service. Try connecting with the modem at a lower connection speed. If reducing the connect speed lets you connect, call your telephone service. The telephone line may be too noisy. You cannot connect to the Internet The ISP may be having technical difficulties. Contact your ISP for technical support. See if the modem works with a different communications program. The problem may be with just one program. www.gateway.com 299 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Your 56K modem does not connect at 56K Current FCC regulations restrict actual data transfer rates over public telephone lines to 53K. Other factors, such as line noise, telephone service provider equipment, or ISP limitations, may lower the speed even further. If your convertible tablet PC has a v.90 modem, the speed at which you can upload (send) data is limited to 33.6K. If your convertible tablet PC has a v.92 modem, the speed at which you can upload data is limited to 48K. Your ISP may not support 48K uploads. You can check modem connection speeds and dial-up network (DUN) connections by accessing the gateway.your.way dial-up server. The server also contains drivers, patches, and updates for current Gateway hardware and software. The server provides a secure connection and is a stand-alone server. You cannot use it to access the Internet. The server cannot be accessed Mondays from 8:00 a.m. to 12:00 p.m. CT. To access the gateway.your.way dial-up server:

1 Insert the red Drivers and Applications CD into the DVD or DVD/CD-RW drive. 2 Click/Tap Help, then click/tap Support Web Site. 3 To check your modem connection speed, click/tap the Direct Dial option. After your modem connects, move the mouse pointer over the Dial-Up Networking icon (located next to the clock on your taskbar). Your modem connection speed appears. Your fax communications program only sends and receives faxes at 14,400 bps when you have a 56K modem Current fax technology only supports a maximum send and receive rate of 14,400 bps. The modem is not recognized by your convertible tablet PC Make sure that the line connected to the modem is working and plugged into the appropriate port on your convertible tablet PC. See Right Side on page 5 to make sure that the connections have been made correctly. 300 www.gateway.com Troubleshooting If the modem shares the telephone line with another device, make sure that the telephone line is not in use (for example, someone is on the telephone, or another modem is in use). Use the modem cable that came with your convertible tablet PC. Some telephone cables do not meet required cable standards and may cause problems with the modem connection. Shut down and restart your convertible tablet PC. Run Windows modem diagnostics. To run modem diagnostics:

1 Close all open programs. 2 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. 3 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Phone and Modem Options icon, then click/tap the Modems tab. 4 Click/Tap your modem, then click/tap Properties. The Modem Properties dialog box opens. 5 Click/Tap the Diagnostic tab, then click/tap Query Modem. If information about the modem appears, the modem passed diagnostics. If no modem information is available, a white screen appears with no data, or if you get an error such as port already open or the modem has failed to respond, the modem did not pass diagnostics. Help and Support For more information about modem troubleshooting, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword modem troubleshooting in the Search box arrow.

, then click/tap the www.gateway.com 301 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting The modem is noisy when it dials and connects When your modem tries to connect to another modem, it begins handshaking. Handshaking is a digital getting acquainted conversation between the two modems that establishes connection speeds and communication protocols. You may hear unusual handshaking sounds when the modems first connect. If the handshaking sounds are too loud, you can turn down the modem volume. To turn down the modem volume:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Phone and Modem Options icon, then click/tap the Modems tab. 3 Click/Tap the modem you want to adjust, then click/tap Properties. 4 Click/Tap the Modem tab, then adjust the Speaker volume control. 5 Click/Tap OK twice to close the Phone and Modem Options dialog box. Mouse The external mouse does not work Make sure that the mouse cable is plugged in correctly. Shut down and restart your convertible tablet PC. Remove all extension cables and switch boxes. Try a mouse you know is working to make sure that the mouse port works. The external mouse works erratically Clean the mouse. For more information, see Cleaning the mouse on page 245. Some mouse pad patterns confuse optical mice. Try the mouse on a different surface. 302 www.gateway.com Troubleshooting Networks You cannot connect to your company network Every network is unique. Contact your company computer department or network administrator for help. Help and Support For more information about network troubleshooting, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword network troubleshooting in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Operating system The program I am working in has stopped responding but the cursor moves and other programs work The program has crashed. Press the Windows Security button on the convertible tablet PCs LCD panel to open the Task Manager and close the non-responsive program.

-OR-

Press CTRL+ALT+DEL to open the Task Manager and close the non-responsive program. The convertible tablet PC keeps showing the wrong date and time even after resetting The CMOS battery on the system board may need to be replaced. Contact Gateway technical support. The convertible tablet PC seems to be operating more slowly than usual The hard drive is full or nearly full. Run the Disk Cleanup utility to clear out unnecessary and temporary files, and remove unneeded programs and files. For more information, see Using Disk Cleanup on page 237. The hard drive needs defragmenting. Run Disk Defragmenter to consolidate files and folders on the hard drive. For more information, see Defragmenting the hard drive on page 240. www.gateway.com 303 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting The convertible tablet PC is in Portrait or Secondary Landscape orientation. Though changing the orientation should not slow the convertible tablet PC considerably, try changing back to Primary Landscape orientation. Passwords Your convertible tablet PC does not accept your password Make sure that CAPS LOCK and PAD LOCK are turned off, then retype the password. You forgot your startup password The password feature (which is set in the BIOS Setup utility) is very secure, with no easy way to recover a forgotten password. You must return your convertible tablet PC for repair. Call Gateway Technical Support for instructions. PC Cards You installed a PC Card and now your convertible tablet PC is having problems The card is incorrectly inserted. Eject the card and re-insert it with the label side up. For more information, see Adding and removing a PC Card on page 258. Make sure that you have correctly installed required software for the PC Card. For more information, see your PC Cards documentation. Make sure that the PC Card you installed is not causing a system resource conflict. For more information on resource conflicts, see Device installation on page 288. Pen The convertible tablet PC does not respond to the pen You are not using the correct pen. Use only Penabled digitizer pens by Wacom such as your convertible tablet PCs pen. The convertible tablet PC does not respond to some other tablet pens or plastic pens. 304 www.gateway.com Troubleshooting The pen tip does not line up with the pointer when I tap the screen The pen and display need recalibrating in both Landscape and Portrait mode. Recalibrate through the Pen Settings tab of the Tablet and Pen Settings dialog box. For more information, see Adjusting tablet and pen settings on page 200. Power Your convertible tablet PC is not working on AC power Make sure that your AC power adapter is connected correctly to your convertible tablet PC. For more information, see Connecting the AC adapter on page 19. If your convertible tablet PC is plugged into a surge protector, make sure that the surge protector is connected securely to an electrical outlet, turned on, and working correctly. To test the outlet, plug a working device, such as a lamp, into the outlet and turn it on. Make sure that the AC power adapter cables are free from cuts or damage. Replace any damaged cables. Your convertible tablet PC is not working on battery power Make sure that the battery is installed correctly. For more information, see Replacing the main battery on page 172. Make sure that the optional secondary battery is installed correctly. For more information, see Installing a secondary battery on page 174. Make sure that the batteries are fully recharged. For more information, see Recharging the battery on page 169. Make sure that the battery is calibrated correctly. For more information, see Recalibrating the battery on page 170. Your convertible tablet PC will not turn off, even after sliding and holding the power switch for five seconds If your convertible tablet PC has frozen, and sliding and holding the power switch for five seconds does not turn it off, insert a straightened paper clip into the reset hole on the bottom of your convertible tablet PC. For the location of the reset hole, see Bottom on page 7. www.gateway.com 305 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting The battery seems to run down very quickly Peripheral devices and programs that make heavy use of the hard drive drain the battery more quickly. Use AC power whenever possible, and readjust the Power Properties to Max Battery when AC power is unavailable. For more information, see Changing the power scheme on page 179. The battery is weakening or defective. All batteries run down in time, but if a new battery appears to be defective, contact Gateway about replacing it. The convertible tablet PC will not turn on The Power switch has not been fully engaged. Slide and hold the Power switch for at least a half-second, but no more than three seconds. The battery is fully discharged but AC power is not connected. Connect the AC adapter to power the convertible tablet PC and charge the battery. The convertible tablet PC turns on and the hard drive status indicator flashes, but nothing appears on the display Display brightness is set too low. For more information, see Adjusting brightness on page 192. The convertible tablet PC will not enter Hibernate mode Hibernate mode is not activated. For more information, see Activating and using Hibernate mode on page 182. The convertible tablet PC will not come out of Standby or Hibernate mode when running on battery power. The battery fully discharged and AC power is not connected. Connect the AC power adapter to power the convertible tablet PC and charge the battery. The display goes black while the convertible tablet PC is still turned on Convertible tablet PC has gone into Standby after sitting idle (power status indicator is blinking blue). Slide and hold the Power switch for about a second to resume operations. Convertible tablet PC has gone into low-battery Hibernate (power status indicator is blinking blue). Slide and hold the Power switch for about a second to resume operations, and charge the battery. 306 www.gateway.com Printer Troubleshooting The printer will not turn on Make sure that the printer is online. Many printers have an online/offline button that you may need to press. Make sure that the power cable is plugged into an AC power source. The printer is on but will not print Check the cable between the printer and your convertible tablet PC. Make sure that it is connected to the correct port. Make sure that the printer is online. Many printers have an online/offline button that you may need to press so the printer can start printing. Press the button to put the printer online. Check the port and cable for bent or broken pins. If the printer you want to print to is not the default printer, make sure that you have selected it in the printer setup. To set a default printer:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Printers and Faxes icon. The Printers and Faxes window opens. 3 Right-click/Button-tap the name of the printer you want to be the default printer, then click/tap Set as Default Printer. Reinstall the printer driver. See the guide that came with your printer for instructions on installing the printer driver. You see a Printer queue is full error message Make sure that the printer is not set to work offline. www.gateway.com 307 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting To make sure that the printer is not set to work offline:

1 Click/Tap Start, then click/tap Control Panel. The Control Panel window opens. If your Control Panel is in Category View, click/tap Printers and Other Hardware. 2 Click/Double-click/Tap/Double-tap the Printers and Faxes icon. The Printers and Faxes window opens. 3 Right-click/Button-tap the name of the printer you want to use. If the menu shows a check mark next to Use Printer Offline, click/tap Use Printer Offline to clear the check mark. Help and Support For more information about printer troubleshooting, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword printer troubleshooter in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Wait until files have been printed before sending additional files to the printer. If you print large files or many files at one time, you may want to add additional memory to the printer. See the printer documentation for instructions for adding additional memory. You see a Printer is out of paper error message After adding paper, make sure that the printer is online. Most printers have an online/offline button that you need to press after adding paper. Sound You are not getting sound from the built-in speakers Make sure that headphones are not plugged into the headphone jack. For the location of the headphone jack, see Left Side on page 3 and Back on page 280. Make sure that the volume control on your convertible tablet PC is turned up. For more information, see System key combinations on page 30. Make sure that the Windows volume control is turned up. For more information, see Adjusting the volume on page 102. 308 www.gateway.com Troubleshooting Make sure that Mute controls are turned off. For more information about the mute setting, see System key combinations on page 30 or Adjusting the volume on page 102. Help and Support For more information about troubleshooting sound issues, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword sound troubleshooter in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Touchpad The touchpad does not work. Attaching a PS/2 mouse to your port replicator may deactivate the touchpad. Video The external monitor is not working Make sure that you have pressed FN+LCD/CRT to activate the external monitor option. Make sure that the monitor is turned on and that the video cable is connected correctly. TV out is not working Make sure that you have activated TV out. For more information, see Viewing the display on a television on page 162. Make sure that the television is turned on and that the S-Video cable is connected correctly. Televisions in different countries use different standards. If you are traveling, you may need to change the TV Out mode. For more information, see Viewing the display on a television on page 162. www.gateway.com 309 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Telephone support Before calling Gateway Technical Support If you have a technical problem with your convertible tablet PC, follow these recommendations before contacting Gateway Technical Support:

Make sure that your convertible tablet PC is connected correctly to a grounded AC outlet that is supplying power. If you use a surge protector, make sure that it is turned on. If a peripheral device, such as a keyboard or mouse, does not appear to work, make sure that all cables are plugged in securely. If you have recently installed hardware or software, make sure that you have installed it according to the instructions provided with it. If you did not purchase the hardware or software from Gateway, see the manufacturers documentation and technical support resources. If you have how to questions about using a program, see:

Online Help Printed documentation The Microsoft Windows documentation The software publishers Web site See the troubleshooting section of this chapter. Warning To avoid bodily injury, do not attempt to troubleshoot your convertible tablet PC problem if:

Power cords or plugs are damaged Liquid has been spilled into your convertible tablet PC Your convertible tablet PC was dropped The case was damaged Instead, unplug your convertible tablet PC and contact a qualified computer technician. Have your customer ID, serial number, and order number available, along with a detailed description of your problem, including the exact text of any error messages, and the steps you have taken. Make sure that your convertible tablet PC is nearby at the time of your call. The technician may have you follow troubleshooting steps. 310 www.gateway.com Telephone support Telephone numbers Gateway offers a wide range of customer service, technical support, and information services. Automated troubleshooting system Service description How to reach Use an automated menu system and your telephone keypad to find answers to common problems. 800-846-2118 (US) 877-709-2945 (Canada) Telephone numbers You can access the following services through your telephone to get answers to your questions:

Resource Service description Fax on demand support Order a catalog of documents on common problems, then order documents by document numbers. The documents will be faxed to you. Gateways fee-based software tutorial service Gateway Technical Support Get tutorial assistance for software issues billed by the minute. Talk to a Gateway Technical Support representative about a non-tutorial technical support question. (See Before calling Gateway Technical Support on page 310 before calling.) TDD Technical Support (for hearing impaired) is available:

Weekdays 6:00 a.m. - 8:00 p.m. Central Time Weekends 6:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. Central Time How to reach 800-846-4526 (US) 877-709-2951 (Canada) 800-229-1103 (charged to your credit card) 900-555-4695 (charged to your telephone bill) 800-846-2301 (US) 800-846-3609 (Canada and Puerto Rico) 605-232-2191

(all other countries) 800-846-1778 (TDD) America Online Get support for your America Online ISP account 800-827-6364 (US) 888-265-4357 (Canada) CompuServe Get support for your CompuServe ISP account 800-848-8990 (US) Sales, accounting, and warranty Get information about available systems, pricing, orders, billing statements, warranty service, or other non-technical issues. 800-846-2000 (US) 888-888-2037 (Canada) www.gateway.com 311 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting Tutoring and training Gateways Technical Support professionals cannot provide hardware and software training or tutorial services. Instead, Gateway recommends the following tutoring and training resources. Self-help If you have how-to questions about using your Gateway-supplied hardware or software, see the following resources:

The printed or online documentation that came with your hardware or software. In many cases, additional product information and online documentation for Gateway-supplied hardware can be found in our Web sites Documentation Library This users guide The software publishers Web site Help and Support For more how-to information about Windows XP, click/tap Start, then click/tap Help and Support. Type the keyword practice in the Search box

, then click/tap the arrow. Tutoring For help on using hardware or software that came with your Gateway convertible tablet PC, contact Gateways fee-based tutorial hotline:

800-229-1103 (rate charged per minute; charged to a major credit card) 900-555-4695 (rate charged per minute; charged to your telephone bill) 312 www.gateway.com Tutoring and training Training Gateway provides the following in-person and computerized training:

Resource Service description In-Store Training at Gateway stores Our friendly and knowledgeable software trainers can teach you how to use the Internet and the most popular software programs, including Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint. Gateway Learning Libraries A variety of courses and tutorials are available on CD. Select from several easy-to-use learning libraries. Online Training from Learn@Gateway More than 450 online courses are available from Learn@Gateway. All you have to do is go online and log in. You select the subject matter, and the learning format (self-paced tutorials or virtual classrooms), all from the comfort of your convertible tablet PC. For more information www.gateway.com/store www.gateway.com/training www.learnatgateway.com/

www.gateway.com 313 Chapter 17: Troubleshooting 314 www.gateway.com Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information A Important safety information Your Gateway system is designed and tested to meet the latest standards for safety of information technology equipment. However, to ensure safe use of this product, it is important that the safety instructions marked on the product and in the documentation are followed. Warning Always follow these instructions to help guard against personal injury and damage to your Gateway system. 315 Appendix A: Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information Setting up your system Read and follow all instructions marked on the product and in the documentation before you operate your system. Retain all safety and operating instructions for future use. Do not use this product near water or a heat source such as a radiator. Set up the system on a stable work surface. The product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating label. If your computer has a voltage selector switch, make sure that the switch is in the proper position for your area. The voltage selector switch is set at the factory to the correct voltage. Openings in the computer case are provided for ventilation. Do not block or cover these openings. Make sure you provide adequate space, at least 6 inches (15 cm), around the system for ventilation when you set up your work area. Never insert objects of any kind into the computer ventilation openings. Some products are equipped with a three-wire power cord to make sure that the product is properly grounded when in use. The plug on this cord will fit only into a grounding-type outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into an outlet, contact an electrician to install the appropriate outlet. If you use an extension cord with this system, make sure that the total ampere rating on the products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. If your system is fitted with a TV Tuner, cable, or satellite receiver card, make sure that the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and buildup of static charges. Care during use Do not walk on the power cord or allow anything to rest on it. Do not spill anything on the system. The best way to avoid spills is to avoid eating and drinking near your system. Some products have a replaceable CMOS battery on the system board. There is a danger of explosion if the CMOS battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. When the computer is turned off, a small amount of electrical current still flows through the computer. To avoid electrical shock, always unplug all power cables and modem cables from the wall outlets before cleaning the system. Unplug the system from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified personnel if:

The power cord or plug is damaged. Liquid has been spilled into the system. The system does not operate properly when the operating instructions are followed. The system was dropped or the cabinet is damaged. The system performance changes. 316 www.gateway.com Important safety information Replacement parts and accessories Use only replacement parts and accessories recommended by Gateway. Important Do not use Gateway products in areas classified as hazardous locations. Such areas include patient care areas of medical and dental facilities, oxygen-laden environments, or industrial facilities. Warning To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications line cord. www.gateway.com 317 Appendix A: Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information Regulatory compliance statements Wireless Guidance Low power, Radio transmitting type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), may be present (embedded) in your notebook system. These devices may operate in the 2.4 GHz (i.e. 802.11B/G LAN & Bluetooth), 5.2 GHz (i.e. 802.11A LAN), and traditional cellular or PCS cellular bands (i.e. Cellular data modem). The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device. Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, please contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your notebook is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your notebook) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, Gateway believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation. The wireless devices installed in this system are intended to be used indoors. In some areas, use of these devices outdoors is prohibited. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:

Warning Warning Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. 802.11B (also known as wireless Ethernet or Wifi) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication. In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device. 318 www.gateway.com Regulatory compliance statements Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. If your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country. If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Please contact Gateway for service. Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the Gateway System Restoration Kit, or contact Gateway Technical Support for additional information. In order to comply with FCC requirements transmitters must not be operated (or co-located) in conjunction with any other transmitter or antenna installed in the convertible tablet PC. www.gateway.com 319 Appendix A: Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information United States of America Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power, Radio transmitter type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz band and/or 5.15 5.35 GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. This equipment complies with FCC radio frequency electromagnetic signal (RF) exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment of a portable transmitting device. The wireless devices installed in this system are intended to be used indoors. In some areas, use of these devices outdoors is prohibited. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Warning Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact Gateway for service. Warning The transmitting device embedded in this system may not be used with any antenna other than provide with the system. Unintentional emitter per FCC Part 15 This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio or television reception. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 320 www.gateway.com Regulatory compliance statements Compliance Accessories: The accessories associated with this equipment are: shielded video cable when an external monitor is connected. These accessories are required to be used in order to ensure compliance with FCC rules. FCC declaration of conformity Responsible party:

Gateway Companies, Inc. 610 Gateway Drive, North Sioux City, SD 57049

(605) 232-2000 Fax: (605) 232-2023 Product:

Gateway M275 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of this product is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Gateway could void the FCC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. www.gateway.com 321 Appendix A: Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information Telecommunications per FCC part 68

(applicable to products fitted with USA modems) Your modem complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules. On the computer or modem card is a label that contains the FCC registration number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this device. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. An FCC-compliant telephone line cord with a modular plug is required for use with this device. The modem is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68-compliant. See installation instructions for details. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five

(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. If this device causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. The telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission or public service commission for information. When programming or making test calls to emergency numbers:

Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours such as early morning or late evenings. The United States Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent, an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. Refer to your fax communication software documentation for details on how to comply with the fax-branding requirement. 322 www.gateway.com Regulatory compliance statements Canada Industry Canada (IC) Intentional emitter per RSS 210 Low power, Radio transmitter type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz band and/or 5.15 5.35 GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in Canada if an Industry Canada ID number is on the system label. This equipment complies with Industry Canada radio frequency electromagnetic signal (RF) exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment of a portable transmitting device Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Warning To prevent radio interference to licensed service or co-channel Mobile Satellite systems, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warning Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact Gateway for service. Warning The transmitting device embedded in this system may not be used with any antenna other than provide with the system. Warning The 802.11A radio LAN your system may have been equipped with operates in the same frequency range as high power radar, which has priority use, and may damage the radio LAN if both are present and being used in the same area. www.gateway.com 323 Appendix A: Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information Unintentional emitter per ICES-003 This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par Industrie Canada. Telecommunications per Industry Canada CS-03

(for products fitted with an IC-compliant modem) The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operation, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should make sure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should make sure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Warning To avoid electrical shock or equipment malfunction do not attempt to make electrical ground connections by yourself. Contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5. 324 www.gateway.com Regulatory compliance statements Mexico Intentional emitter Low power, Radio transmitter type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in Mexico if a COFETEL ID is on the system label. This equipment complies with radio frequency electromagnetic signal (RF) exposure limits for an uncontrolled environment of a portable transmitting device. Unintentional emitter At this time there are no mandatory requirements for Unintentional Emitters. However, this device does comply with multiple requirements for other countries and regions as listed on the system label and in the users manual. Laser safety statement All Gateway systems equipped with CD and DVD drives comply with the appropriate safety standards, including IEC 825. The laser devices in these components are classified as Class 1 Laser Products under a US Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard. Should the unit ever need servicing, contact an authorized service location. Warning Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To prevent exposure to laser beams, do not try to open the enclosure of a CD or DVD drive. California Proposition 65 Warning Warning This product contains chemicals, including lead, known to the State of California to cause cancer and/or birth defects or reproductive harm. www.gateway.com 325 Appendix A: Safety, Regulatory, and Legal Information Notices Copyright 2003 Gateway, Inc. All Rights Reserved 14303 Gateway Place Poway, CA 92064 USA All Rights Reserved This publication is protected by copyright and all rights are reserved. No part of it may be reproduced or transmitted by any means or in any form, without prior consent in writing from Gateway. The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate. However, changes are made periodically. These changes are incorporated in newer publication editions. Gateway may improve and/or change products described in this publication at any time. Due to continuing system improvements, Gateway is not responsible for inaccurate information which may appear in this manual. For the latest product updates, consult the Gateway Web site at www.gateway.com. In no event will Gateway be liable for direct, indirect, special, exemplary, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. In the interest of continued product development, Gateway reserves the right to make improvements in this manual and the products it describes at any time, without notices or obligation. Trademark Acknowledgments 1-800-GATEWAY, ActiveCPR, ALR, AnyKey, black-and-white spot design, CrystalScan, Destination, DestiVu, EZ Pad, EZ Point, Field Mouse, Gateway 2000, Gateway Country, gateway.net, Gateway stylized logo, Perfect Scholar, Solo, TelePath, Vivitron, stylized G design, and Youve got a friend in the business slogan are registered trademarks and black-and-white spotted box logo, GATEWAY, Gateway Astro, Gateway@Work, Gateway Connected touch pad, Gateway Connected music player, Gateway Cyber:)Ware, Gateway Education:)Ware, Gateway Flex Case, Gateway Gaming:)Ware, Gateway GoBack, Gateway Gold, Gateway Learning:)Ware, Gateway Magazine, Gateway Micro Server, Gateway Money:)Ware, Gateway Music:)Ware, Gateway Networking Solutions, Gateway Online Network (O.N.) solution, Gateway Photo:)Ware, Gateway Professional PCs, Gateway Profile, Gateway Solo, green stylized GATEWAY, green stylized Gateway logo, Gateway Teacher:)Ware, Gateway Video:)Ware, HelpSpot, InforManager, Just click it!, Learn@Gateway, Kids BackPack, SERVE-TO-ORDER, Server Watchdog, the Spotted G Gateway Logo and the Spotted G Logo, SpotShop, Spotshop.com, and Your:)Ware are trademarks of Gateway, Inc. Intel, Intel Inside logo, and Pentium are registered trademarks and MMX is a trademark of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only, and may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Macrovision statement If your computer has a DVD drive and an analog TV Out port, the following paragraph applies:

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 326 www.gateway.com Index A AC adapter connecting 19 connector 6, 280 damaged 19 defective 20 international adapters 176 troubleshooting 306 AC-3 digital audio jack 280 access point network 216 accessories purchasing 13 safety precautions 317 accounts America Online 81 ISP 81 user 205 acoustic handset coupler 186 ad hoc networking 218, 219 adding icons to desktop 61 user accounts 205 See also installing address e-mail 86 Web 84 airplane power adapter 13 alarms 178, 180 America Online 82 application key 28, 29 arrow keys 28, 29 AU file 107 audio adjusting volume 31 digital jack 280 headphone jack 4, 280 microphone jack 3, 8, 280 muting 31, 102 playing 105, 107, 108, 114 recording 105 streaming 209 troubleshooting 308 volume down button 31 volume up button 31 audio CD adding tracks to library 121 copying 134 creating 130 editing track information 120 playing with MusicMatch 116 See CD audio file streaming 209 automobile power adapter 13 AVI file 107 B background 197 backing up files 152, 242 battery 13 alarm options 178, 180 alternate power sources 176 bay 7, 172 changing 172 charge indicator 20, 26, 168 charge status 168 charging 19, 169 conserving power 176 icons 168 installing 172 installing secondary 174 latch 7 managing power 176 monitoring charge 168 recalibrating 170 recharging 19, 169 release latch 7 safety guidelines 17 secondary 2, 174 storing 230 327 bays battery 7, 172 CD drive 2, 110 diskette drive 110 DVD drive 2, 110 DVD/CD-RW drive 2, 110 DVD-RW/CD-RW drive 2, 110 hard drive 7, 273 memory 7, 261 memory card reader 110 module 2, 110 second hard drive 2, 110 secondary battery 174 BIOS Setup utility 170, 188 break system key 30 brightness adjusting 192 brightness system keys 28, 30, 31 broadband Internet connection 49, 80, 208 browser Web 81, 83 browsing for files and folders 70 buttons programming 201 security 303 setting functions 295 button-tapping 41 C cable lock convertible tablet PC 3, 5, 278 port replicator 284 using while traveling 188 cable modem 49, 80, 212, 216 calibrating 42, 305 camera See digital camera See digital video camera Caps Lock indicator 27 capturing video 158 cards adding memory card 155 328 adding PC Card 258 inserting memory card 155 inserting PC Card 258 installing memory card 155 installing PC Card 258 memory card slots 3, 154 PC Card eject button 259 PC Card slot 3 reinstalling PC Card 258 removing memory card 155 removing PC Card 258 replacing memory card 155 replacing PC Card 258 troubleshooting memory card 298 troubleshooting PC Card 304 care and maintenance 190, 230 carrying case 13 CD adding tracks to your library 121 cleaning 293 copying 134, 142 creating audio 130, 148 creating data 125, 138 creating label 152 creating music 130, 148 editing track information 120 inserting 113 playing audio with MusicMatch 116 playing music 114 troubleshooting 291 CD Copier 134 CD drive See DVD drive CD-RW See CD CD-RW drive See DVD/CD-RW drive cellular telephone memory cards 154 Certificate of Authenticity 11 changing bay modules 110 cleaning audio CD 293 case 244 CD 293 computer exterior 244 computer screen 245 DVD 293 keyboard 245 LCD panel 245 mouse 245 screen 245 clicking 36, 41 clipboard 66 close button 63 closing color program 63, 78 unresponsive program 24 window 63, 78 changing depth 193 changing desktop 197 changing number of 193 changing scheme 196 connecting AC adapter 19 camera 156 digital camera 156 external keyboard 28 external monitor 160 keyboard 28 modem 47 port replicator 282 printer 49, 225 projector 160 PS/2 keyboard 281 PS/2 mouse 281 scanner 49, 225 surge protector 21 to Ethernet 48 to Internet 49, 82 to network 48 to Web site 84 video camera 158 connections AC-3 digital audio 280 audio 3, 280 digital audio out 280 digital camera 6, 49, 279, 280 digital video camera 3, 49, 158, 159 diskette drive 6, 49, 279, 280 docking 6, 278 Ethernet 6, 48, 281 external audio 3, 281 external speakers 4, 280 Firewire 3, 49, 158, 159 flash drive 6, 279 headphone 4, 280 i.Link 3, 49, 158, 159 IEEE 1394 3, 49, 158, 159 keyboard 6, 279, 280, 281 line in 281 microphone 3, 8, 280 modem 5, 47 monitor (VGA) 6, 160, 281 mouse 6, 279, 280, 281 network 6, 48, 281 parallel 281 port replicator 6, 278 power 6, 19, 280 printer 6, 279, 280, 281 projector 160 PS/2 281 PS/2 keyboard 281 PS/2 mouse 281 S/PDIF 280 scanner 6, 49, 279, 280 serial 281 speaker 4, 280 S-Video (TV) out 162, 280 Toslink digital audio 280 troubleshooting 295 USB 6, 49, 279, 280 VGA 6, 160, 281 video camera 3, 49, 158, 159 Zip drive 6, 49, 279, 280 copying CD 134, 142 data CD 134, 142 329 data DVD 134, 142 files and folders 66, 78 music CD 134, 142 music tracks 145 text and graphics 78 copyright notice 326 creating CD label 152 data CD 125 data DVD 125 desktop icons 61 desktop shortcuts 61 documents 74 DVD label 152 folders 65 movies 158 MP3 files 118 music CD 130, 148 music files 118 Customer Service Accounting 311 Sales 311 Warranty 311 customizing 191 cutting files and folders 66, 78 text and graphics 78 D default printer 307 defragmenting hard drive 240 deleting files and folders 60, 68, 69, 78, display 237 desktop adding icons 61 adding shortcuts 61 adjusting settings 193 changing background 197 changing color depth 193 changing color scheme 196 changing number of colors 193 selecting screen saver 199 using 59, 60 330 using Start menu 60 device drivers See drivers dialing codes 186 digital audio using 108 digital audio S/PDIF jack 280 digital camera connecting 156 serial port 281 USB port 6, 279, 280 digital photography connecting a digital camera 156 using memory card reader 154 digital video camera connecting 158 IEEE 1394 port 3 directional keys 29 Disk Cleanup 237 Disk Defragmenter 240 diskette inserting 152 troubleshooting 289 diskette drive activity indicator 153 eject button 152 locating 3 replacing drive module 110 troubleshooting 289 using 152 adjusting brightness 192 brightness 192 changing orientation 192 changing resolution 195 maintaining 230 orientation 192, 304 properties 160 settings 193 switching 30 troubleshooting 290, 306 using 38 using screen saver 199 Do More With Gateway 53 docking port 6, 278 docking release latch 278 documentation eSupport 55 Gateway Web site 55 help 52 Help and Support 52 online help 54 documents creating 74 opening 76 printing 77 saving 75 double-clicking 36, 41 double-tapping 41 downloading files 85 dragging 37 drivers reinstalling 249 updating 55, 251 drives backing up files 242 CD 2 changing modular drives 110 checking for errors 238 checking for free space 236 defragmenting 240 deleting files 237 diskette 3, 152 DVD 2, 112 DVD/CD-RW 2, 112, 125, 136 DVD-RW/CD-RW 2, 125 hard drive 7, 273 identifying drive types 112 installing and replacing 110 replacing hard drive 273 sharing 208 troubleshooting 289, 291, 294 types 112 viewing contents 64 viewing files and folders 64 DSL modem 49, 80, 212, 216 DVD cleaning 293 copying 134, 142 creating data 125, 138 creating label 152 inserting 113 playing 124, 162 troubleshooting 291 DVD drive identifying 112 locating 2 replacing drive module 110 status indicator 25 testing 152 testing speed 152 troubleshooting 291 using 112 DVD/CD-RW drive identifying 112 locating 2 replacing drive module 110 status indicator 25 testing 152 testing speed 152 troubleshooting 291 using 112, 125, 136 DVD-RW/CD-RW drive replacing drive module 110 using 125 E Easy CD Creator 125 eject button diskette drive 153 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 260 e-mail address 86 button 33 checking for messages 87 program 81 sending 86 transferring settings from old computer 225 331 using 86 EmPower power adapter 176 Error-checking 238 eSupport finding specifications 12 using 55 Ethernet connecting 48 jack 6, 48, 281 turning wireless Ethernet on or off 220 wired network 210, 211 wireless network 210, 214 external audio jack 281 external monitor 6, 30, 281 EZ Pad touchpad See touchpad F fan 6 Fast Ethernet 211 faxes automatically canceling 99 canceling 97 configuring Fax 91 failed transmission 98 installing Fax 90 receiving and viewing 97 retrying 98 sending 93 sending from program 96 sending scanned image 96 setting up cover page template 95 troubleshooting 300 files backing up 242 copying 66, 78 cutting 66, 78 deleting 60, 68, 78, 237 downloading 85 finding 70, 71 moving 66 opening 36, 60 332 pasting 66, 78 recovering 68 renaming 78 searching for 70, 71, 222 transferring 187, 222 troubleshooting 293 types 222 viewing list 64 Files and Settings Transfer Wizard 222 finding files and folders 70, 71, 222 Help and Support topics 52 specifications 12 Firewire port 3, 49, 158, 159 floppy disk See diskette Fn key 28, 29, 30 folders copying 66, 78 creating 65 cutting 66, 78 deleting 60, 68, 78 finding 70, 71 moving 66 opening 36, 64 pasting 66, 78 recovering 68 renaming 78 searching for 70, 71 viewing list 64 fragmentation 240 function keys 28, 29 G game Gateway multi-player 209 eSupport 12 model number 7, 10 serial number 11, 12 Web address 55 Web site 55 gateway.your.way dial-up server 300 gigabit Ethernet 211 installing H hard drive backing up files 242 bay 7 checking for errors 238 checking for free space 236 defragmenting 240 deleting files and folders 237 installing 273 replacing 273 scanning for errors 238 status indicator 25 troubleshooting 294, 303 headphone jack 4, 280 help button 34 online 54 using 52 Help and Support searching 52 starting 52 using 52 Help and Support Center 58 Hibernate mode 177, 182 troubleshooting 306 home office network 207 hot-swapping 49, 258 hyperlinks 83 I i.Link port 3, 49, 158, 159 IEEE 1394 port 3, 49, 158, 159 IEEE 802.11 creating a network 210 speed and frequency 215 using a network 214 using while traveling 187 indicators See status indicators Inkball 58 inkjet printer 14 battery 172, 174 bay modules 110 camera 156 cards 154, 258 device drivers 249 devices 49, 288 digital camera 49, 156 digital video camera 49 drivers 249 drives 110 DVD drive 110 DVD/CD-RW drive 110 DVD-RW/CD-RW drive 110 Fax 90 hard drive 273 InterVideo DVD player 124 memory 261 Microsoft Fax 90 PC Card 258 peripheral devices 49, 225 Pinnacle Expression 159 printer 49, 225 programs 227, 252 recordable CD drive 110 recordable DVD drive 110 scanner 49, 225 secondary battery 110, 174 Windows 254 Internal wireless label 11 Internet account 81 broadband connection 49 button 34 connecting to 82 downloading files 85 requirements to access 81 sharing access 208 transferring settings from old computer 224 troubleshooting 295 using 80 Internet connection 333 sharing 208 troubleshooting 295, 299 Internet radio 123 Internet service provider (ISP) connecting to 82 disconnecting from 82 setting up account 81 transferring settings from old computer 224 using 80, 81 InterVideo DVD Player 124 IRQ conflicts 288 ISP See Internet service provider J jacks See connections K Kensington cable lock lock slot 3, 5, 278 port replicator 284 using while traveling 188 key combinations 30 keyboard buttons 28 cleaning 245 connecting 28 features 28 icon 44, 202 locating 9 PS/2 port 281 shortcuts 78 troubleshooting 297 USB port 6, 279, 280 keys application 28, 29 arrow 28, 29 battery status 30 Break 30 brightness 28, 29, 30, 31 directional 29 334 Fn 28, 29, 30 function 29 LCD brightness 29, 31 LCD/CRT 30 navigation 28, 29 numeric keypad 29 Pad Lock 30 Pause 30 power status 30 Scroll Lock 30 Standby 30 Status 30 system 28, 29 system key combinations 30 toggle display 30 volume control 29 Windows 28, 29 L label internal wireless 11 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 11 model number 7, 10 serial number 11 wireless networking 11 laser printer 14 latch battery 7 docking release 278 LCD panel release 2 pen 7 LCD brightness system keys 29 LCD panel changing resolution 195 cleaning 245 release latch 2 switching display 30 troubleshooting 290 using screen saver 199 LCD panel buttons locating 8 LCD/CRT system key 30 lights memory cards See status indicators line in jack 281 line protector 186 line tester 186 links 83 lock Kensington cable 3, 5, 188, 278 M maintenance backing up files 242 checking for drive errors 238 checking hard drive space 236 cleaning case 244 cleaning component exteriors 244 cleaning computer display 245 cleaning keyboard 245 cleaning mouse 245 defragmenting 240 deleting files 237 display screen 230 general guidelines 230, 231 pen 231 suggested schedule 232 using Scheduled Task Wizard 242 virus protection 233 Max Battery power setting 306 maximize button 63 Media Player 107, 114 memory adding 261 bay 7 installing 261 purchasing 13 removing 262, 265 replacing 261 troubleshooting 297 upgrading 261 memory card reader locating 3 memory card types supported 154 using 154 See cards menu bar 63 messages checking e-mail 87 sending e-mail 86 microphone built-in 105 microphone jack 3, 8, 280 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 11 Fax 89 Wordpad 74 MIDI file 107 minimize button 63 model number 10, 188 modem cable 49, 80 connecting 47 connection speed 300 DSL 49, 80 international adapter 186 jack 5, 47 protecting from power surge 21 troubleshooting 298 using 81 modular bay 2 See also bays monitor adding an external 160 changing resolution 195 color quality 161 controls 193 display properties 160 port 6, 281 screen resolution 161 using screen saver 199 cleaning 245 PS/2 port 281 troubleshooting 302 USB port 6, 279, 280 See also touchpad mouse 335 moving files 66 files from old computer 221, 222 folders 66 Internet settings from old computer 224 pointer 36 screen objects 37 settings from old computer 221 MP3 file creating 118 editing track information 120 playing 107 streaming 209 MP3 player memory cards 154 MPEG file See MP3 file multi-function buttons 9, 33 multimedia adjusting volume 102 playing audio CD 114 playing DVD 124 recording audio 105 using diskette drive 152 using DVD drive 112 using Windows Media Player 107, 114, 124 multi-player game playing 209 music See audio music library building 121 changing settings 122 music tracks copying 145 MusicMatch building music library 121 changing library settings 122 creating MP3 files 118 creating music files 118 editing track information 120 336 listening to Internet radio 123 playing audio CD 116 muting sound 31, 102 My Computer button 34 N navigation keys 28, 29 Nero Express 136 network jack 6, 48, 281 troubleshooting 303 217, 219 networking network equipment shopping list 213, access point 216, 217 ad hoc 218, 219 computers 207 data transfer speed 211, 214 Ethernet 210, 211 games 209 internal wireless label 11 peer-to-peer 218, 219 selecting connection type 210 sharing devices 209 sharing drives 208 sharing Internet connections 208 sharing printers 209 signal strength 214 streaming audio 209 streaming video 209 turning off wireless Ethernet 220 turning on wireless Ethernet 220 wired connections 210, 211 wireless connections 210, 214 non-technical support Accounting 311 Sales 311 Warranty 311 Norton Antivirus 233 NTSC/PAL jack 162 numeric keypad status indicator 27 using 28, 29 O online help opening button 34 Help and Support 52 using 54 convertible tablet PC 2 documents 76 files 36, 60 folders 36, 64 LCD panel 2 programs 36, 60 shortcut menu 37 operating system troubleshooting 303 option bays changing modules 110 orientation changing 192 P Pad Lock status indicator 27, 30 system key 30 parallel port 49, 281 password 188, 304 pasting files and folders 66, 78 text and graphics 78 pause text scrolling 30 PC Card See cards PC Doctor 287 PCMCIA card See cards PDA memory cards 154 peer-to-peer networking 218, 219 pen 5, 38, 41 button 44 calibrating 42, 304 care 231 gestures 43 latch 7 release latch 7 replacing point 231 tips 44 troubleshooting 304 peripheral devices 13, 49 troubleshooting 306 photography See digital photography Pinnacle Expression 158 playing audio CD 114 audio CD with MusicMatch 116 audio file 105, 107 DVD 124 Media Player file 107 multimedia files 107 multi-player games 209 music CD 114 Windows Media Player file 107 Plug and Play devices IEEE 1394 support for 49 USB support for 49 pointer moving 36 port replicator attaching convertible tablet PC 282 docking port 6, 278 release latch 278 separating convertible tablet PC 283 using 13, 277 ports power See connections AC adapter 19, 176 advanced settings 178, 181 alarms 178, 180 battery 24, 168, 169, 170, 172, 176 button 4, 30, 178 changing modes 177 changing schemes 179 changing settings 178 337 connector 6, 19, 280 conserving battery power 176 damaged cord 19, 20 EmPower adapter 176 extending battery life 176 Hibernate mode 177, 182 indicator 23, 26 international adapter 189 management 167, 176 schemes 178, 179 source problems 21 SpeedStep settings 178 Standby mode 23, 177 Standby/Resume 30 status box 30 status indicator 23, 26 surge protector 21 troubleshooting 305, 306 turning off convertible tablet PC 23 turning on convertible tablet PC 22 power adapter airplane 13 automobile 13 printer default 307 inkjet 14 installing 49, 225 laser 14 parallel port 281 sharing 209 troubleshooting 307 USB port 6, 279, 280 printing documents 77 programs closing 78 closing unresponsive 24 installing 227, 252 opening 36, 60 reinstalling 227, 252 projector adding 160 color quality 161 display properties 160 338 screen resolution 161 PS/2 port 281 R radio listening with MusicMatch 123 radio approval authorities 187 radio frequency wireless connections 187 RAM See memory rebooting convertible tablet PC 24 recalibrating battery 170 recharging battery 169 recordable drive recording identifying drive 112 status indicator 25 troubleshooting 291 using 112, 125, 136 audio file 105 CD tracks 118, 145 data CD 125, 138 data DVD 125, 138 music CD 130, 148 recovering files and folders 68 Recycle Bin deleting files and folders 68 emptying 69 recovering files and folders 68 using 60 re-dialing telephone 98 reinstalling drivers 249 peripheral devices 225 printer 225 programs 227, 252 scanner 225 software 227, 252 Windows 254 removing files and folders 60, 68, 69, 78, 237 renaming files and folders 78 replacing See installing reset hole location 7 using 24 resetting convertible tablet PC 24 resolution changing 195 restarting convertible tablet PC 24 Restoration CDs 248 restoring files and folders 68 right-clicking 37, 41 rocker switch changing settings 204 using 36 router 212, 213 Roxio Easy CD Creator 125 S S/PDIF digital audio using 108 S/PDIF digital audio jack 280 safety caring for computer 230 general precautions 16, 18, 315 guidelines for troubleshooting 286 static electricity 260 saving documents 75 ScanDisk See Error-checking scanner installing 49, 225 USB port 6, 279 scanning drive for errors 238 for viruses 233 Scheduled Tasks Wizard 242 screen adjusting settings 193 changing color depth 193 changing number of colors 193 changing resolution 195 resolution 161 saver 199 troubleshooting 290, 309 screen objects getting information 37 moving 37 selecting 36 status indicator 27, 30 system key 30 Scroll Lock Search utility 72 searching for files and folders 70, 71, 72, 222 in Help and Support 52 security features Kensington cable lock 3, 5, 278 Kensington lock ring 284 security while travelling 188 serial number 11, 12, 188 serial port 49, 281 setting up safety precautions 316 sharing devices 209 drives 208 Internet connection 208 printer 209 See also networking shortcut menus accessing 37 shortcuts adding to desktop 61 buttons 34 closing programs 78 closing windows 78 copying 78 cutting 78 deleting files and folders 78 keyboard 78 opening menu 37 pasting 78 renaming files and folders 78 selecting adjacent items in list 78 selecting items in list 78 339 switching between files, folders, or programs 78 shutting down convertible tablet PC 23, 24 small office network 208 SO-DIMM 261 software See programs sound adjusting 31, 102 controls 29, 102 muting 31, 102 troubleshooting 308 Sound Recorder making audio recordings 105 playing file 105 speakers built-in 4, 5 jack 4, 280 specifications 12 speech recognition 44, 46, 58 SpeedStep technology 178 Standby troubleshooting 306 Standby mode 23, 30, 177 Standby system key 30 Start button 60 Start menu 60 starting convertible tablet PC 22 programs 36, 60 startup password 188 static electricity 260 status indicators battery charge 26, 168 Caps Lock 27 drive activity 25 DVD drive 25 DVD/CD-RW drive 25 hard drive 25 location 6, 8, 9 numeric keypad 27, 30 Pad Lock 27, 30 340 power 23, 26 Scroll Lock 27, 30 Sticky Notes 58 streaming audio and video 209 support Help and Support Center 58 support tool PC Doctor 287 surge protector 21 Suspend 30 S-Video (TV) out jack 162, 280 system identification label 7, 10 system keys 28, 29 combinations 30 T Tablet and Pen Settings 58, 200 Tablet PC Input Panel 44, 58 tapping 41 taskbar 60 Technical Support 311 technical support telephone automated troubleshooting 311 eSupport 12 FaxBack support 311 resources 310 Technical Support 311 tips before contacting 310 tutorial service 311 acoustic handset coupler 186 automatically canceling fax 99 canceling fax 97 configuring Fax 91 installing Fax 90 line protector 186 line tester 186 receiving and viewing faxes 97 retrying fax 98 sending fax 93 sending faxes from program 96 sending scanned image fax 96 setting up fax cover page template 95 using Fax 89 telephone support 310 television playing DVD on 162 TV out jack 162 viewing display on 162 testing tips DVD drive 152 pen 44 title bar 63 Toslink digital audio jack 280 touchpad buttons 35, 36 changing settings 203 clicking 36 double-clicking 36 dragging screen objects 37 locating 9 moving pointer 35, 36 moving screen objects 37 opening files, folders, and programs 36 opening shortcut menu 37 right-clicking 37 rocker switch 36 selecting screen objects 36 training CD 313 classroom 313 Gateway Learning Libraries 313 Learn@Gateway 313 transferring files from Internet 85 files from old computer 221, 222 Internet settings from old computer 224 settings from old computer 221 travel tips 185 troubleshooting audio 308 automated system 311 cleaning CD 293 cleaning DVD 293 device installation 288 diskette drive 289 display 290 DVD drive 291 DVD/CD-RW drive 291 Error-checking 238 faxed answers 311 faxes 300 files 293 gateway.your.way dial-up server 300 general guidelines 287 hard drive 294 Internet connection 295, 299 IRQ conflict 288 keyboard 297 LCD panel 290 memory 297 memory card reader 298 modem 298 mouse 302 network 303 passwords 304 PC Cards 304 PC Doctor 287 power 305 printer 307 reinstalling drivers 249 safety guidelines 286 screen 290, 309 screen area 290 screen resolution 290 sound 308 support tool 287 technical support 310 telephone support 310 touchpad 309 video 309 Web site connection speed 296 turning off convertible tablet PC 23, 24 S/PDIF 108 341 wireless Ethernet 220 turning on convertible tablet PC 22 S/PDIF 108 wireless Ethernet 220 tutoring fee-based 312 TV out (S-Video out) jack 162 U undocking 283 updating device drivers 55 Norton AntiVirus 233 upgrading 257 USB flash drive 13 USB port 6, 49, 279, 280 user accounts adding 205 switching 205 V VGA port 6, 160 video capture 158 playing 107, 124 streaming 209 S-Video out jack 280 troubleshooting 309 video camera connecting 158 video file streaming 209 virus 233 voice recognition 58 volume adjusting 31, 102 adjusting modem 302 controls 29, 102 muting 31, 102 protecting against 233 removing with Norton AntiVirus 342 system keys 28, 31 troubleshooting 308 W waking up convertible tablet PC 23 WAV file 107 Web browser button 34 using 81, 83 Web page 83 Web site connecting to 84 defined 83 downloading files 85 Gateway 55 window close button 63 closing 63, 78 identifying components 62 maximize button 63 menu bar 63 minimize button 63 title bar 63 Windows clipboard 66 desktop 59 Files and Settings Transfer Wizard 222 installing 254 Product Key Code 11 reinstalling 254 reinstalling drivers 249 Search utility 72 updating drivers 251 Windows Journal 58 Windows key 28, 29 Windows Media Player 107, 114, 124 Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 58 wired Ethernet network creating a network 210 equipment list 213 example 212 using 211 wireless Ethernet label 11 using while traveling 187 wireless Ethernet network access point equipment list 217 access point example 216 ad hoc equipment list 219 ad hoc example 218 creating a network 210 peer-to-peer equipment list 219 peer-to-peer example 218 turning off 220 turning on 220 using 214 Wordpad 74 World Wide Web (WWW) downloading files 85 using 83 writing 38, 44 Z Zip drive backing up files 242 USB port 6, 279 343 344